Touch Key Flash Type 8-Bit MCU with LCD/LED Driver BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Revision: V1.20 Date: ��������������� August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Table of Contents Features............................................................................................................. 7 CPU Features.......................................................................................................................... 7 Peripheral Features.................................................................................................................. 7 Selection Table.................................................................................................. 8 Block Diagram................................................................................................... 9 Pin Assignment................................................................................................. 9 Pin Description................................................................................................11 BS85B12-3..............................................................................................................................11 BS85C20-3............................................................................................................................. 13 BS85C20-5............................................................................................................................. 17 Absolute Maximum Ratings........................................................................... 20 D.C. Characteristics........................................................................................ 21 A.C. Characteristics........................................................................................ 22 Power-on Reset Characteristics.................................................................... 23 Oscillator Temperature/Frequency Characteristics.................................... 24 System Architecture....................................................................................... 26 Clocking and Pipelining.......................................................................................................... 26 Program Counter.................................................................................................................... 27 Stack...................................................................................................................................... 28 Arithmetic and Logic Unit – ALU............................................................................................ 28 Flash Program Memory.................................................................................. 29 Structure................................................................................................................................. 29 Special Vectors...................................................................................................................... 29 Look-up Table......................................................................................................................... 29 Table Program Example......................................................................................................... 30 In Circuit Programming.......................................................................................................... 31 RAM Data Memory.......................................................................................... 32 Structure................................................................................................................................. 32 Special Function Register Description......................................................... 32 Indirect Addressing Registers – IAR0, IAR1.......................................................................... 32 Memory Pointers – MP0, MP1............................................................................................... 33 Bank Pointer – BP.................................................................................................................. 35 Accumulator – ACC................................................................................................................ 36 Program Counter Low Register – PCL................................................................................... 36 Look-up Table Registers – TBLP, TBHP, TBLH...................................................................... 36 Status Register – STATUS..................................................................................................... 36 Rev. 1.20 2 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver EEPROM Data Memory................................................................................... 38 EEPROM Data Memory Structure......................................................................................... 38 Reading Data from the EEPROM.......................................................................................... 40 Writing Data to the EEPROM................................................................................................. 40 Write Protection...................................................................................................................... 40 EEPROM Interrupt................................................................................................................. 41 Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 41 Programming Examples......................................................................................................... 41 Oscillator......................................................................................................... 42 Oscillator Overview................................................................................................................ 42 System Clock Configurations................................................................................................. 42 Internal High Speed RC Oscillator – HIRC............................................................................ 42 External 32.768kHz Crystal Oscillator – LXT (BS85C20-5 only)........................................... 43 LXT Oscillator Low Power Function (BS85C20-5 only)......................................................... 44 Internal Low Speed RC Oscillator – LIRC.............................................................................. 44 Operating Modes and System Clocks.......................................................... 44 System Clocks....................................................................................................................... 44 Control Register..................................................................................................................... 46 System Operation Modes....................................................................................................... 47 Operating Mode Switching..................................................................................................... 48 NORMAL Mode to SLOW Mode Switching............................................................................ 49 SLOW Mode to NORMAL Mode Switching............................................................................ 49 Entering the SLEEP Mode..................................................................................................... 49 Entering the IDLE0 Mode....................................................................................................... 50 Entering the IDLE1 Mode....................................................................................................... 50 Standby Current Considerations............................................................................................ 50 Wake-up................................................................................................................................. 51 Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 51 Watchdog Timer.............................................................................................. 52 Watchdog Timer Clock Source............................................................................................... 52 Watchdog Timer Control Register.......................................................................................... 52 Watchdog Timer Operation.................................................................................................... 53 Reset and Initialisation................................................................................... 54 Reset Functions..................................................................................................................... 54 Reset Initial Conditions.......................................................................................................... 55 Input/Output Ports.......................................................................................... 59 I/O Register List..................................................................................................................... 59 Pull-high Resistors................................................................................................................. 60 Port A Wake-up...................................................................................................................... 60 I/O Port Control Register........................................................................................................ 61 Pin Re-mapping Functions..................................................................................................... 61 I/O Pin Structures................................................................................................................... 66 Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 66 Rev. 1.20 3 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Timer Modules – TM....................................................................................... 67 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 67 TM Operation......................................................................................................................... 67 TM Clock Source.................................................................................................................... 68 TM Interrupts.......................................................................................................................... 68 TM External Pins.................................................................................................................... 68 TM Input/Output Pin Control Registers.................................................................................. 69 Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 72 Compact Type TM – CTM............................................................................... 73 Compact TM Operation.......................................................................................................... 73 Compact Type TM Register Description................................................................................ 74 Compact Type TM Operating Modes..................................................................................... 77 Compare Match Output Mode................................................................................................ 77 Timer/Counter Mode.............................................................................................................. 79 PWM Output Mode................................................................................................................. 80 Standard Type TM – STM............................................................................... 82 Standard TM Operation.......................................................................................................... 82 Standard Type TM Register Description................................................................................ 83 Standard Type TM Operating Modes..................................................................................... 87 Compare Match Output Mode................................................................................................ 87 Timer/Counter Mode.............................................................................................................. 88 PWM Output Mode................................................................................................................. 89 Single Pulse Mode................................................................................................................. 91 Capture Input Mode............................................................................................................... 93 Enhanced Type TM – ETM.............................................................................. 94 Enhanced TM Operation........................................................................................................ 94 Enhanced Type TM Register Description............................................................................... 95 Enhanced Type TM Operating Modes................................................................................. 100 Compare Output Mode......................................................................................................... 101 Timer/Counter Mode............................................................................................................ 105 PWM Output Mode............................................................................................................... 105 Single Pulse Output Mode....................................................................................................111 Capture Input Mode..............................................................................................................113 Touch Key Function......................................................................................115 Touch Key Structure..............................................................................................................115 Touch Key Register Definition...............................................................................................115 Touch Key Operation.............................................................................................................119 Touch Key Interrupt.............................................................................................................. 120 Programming Considerations............................................................................................... 120 Serial Interface Module – SIM...................................................................... 121 SPI Interface........................................................................................................................ 121 SPI Registers....................................................................................................................... 122 SPI Communication............................................................................................................. 125 Rev. 1.20 4 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver I2C Interface......................................................................................................................... 127 I2C Registers........................................................................................................................ 128 I2C Bus Communication....................................................................................................... 132 I2C Bus Start Signal.............................................................................................................. 132 Slave Address...................................................................................................................... 133 I2C Bus Read/Write Signal................................................................................................... 133 I2C Bus Slave Address Acknowledge Signal........................................................................ 134 I2C Bus Data and Acknowledge Signal................................................................................ 134 I2C Time-out Control............................................................................................................. 135 Peripheral Clock Output............................................................................... 136 Peripheral Clock Operation.................................................................................................. 136 Interrupts....................................................................................................... 137 Interrupt Registers................................................................................................................ 137 Interrupt Register Contents.................................................................................................. 138 Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................... 144 External Interrupt.................................................................................................................. 146 Multi-function Interrupt......................................................................................................... 146 Time Base Interrupts............................................................................................................ 146 External Peripheral Interrupt................................................................................................ 148 LVD Interrupt........................................................................................................................ 149 TM Interrupts........................................................................................................................ 149 EEPROM Interrupt............................................................................................................... 149 Touch Key Interrupts............................................................................................................ 149 SIM Interrupt........................................................................................................................ 150 Interrupt Wake-up Function.................................................................................................. 150 Programming Considerations............................................................................................... 150 Low Voltage Detector – LVD........................................................................ 151 LVD Register........................................................................................................................ 151 LVD Operation...................................................................................................................... 152 LCD Driver – SCOM and SSEG Function.................................................... 152 LCD Operation..................................................................................................................... 152 LCD Bias Control................................................................................................................. 154 LCD Driver Registers........................................................................................................... 154 LED Driver..................................................................................................... 156 LED Driver Operation........................................................................................................... 156 LED Driver Registers........................................................................................................... 156 Application Circuits...................................................................................... 157 Instruction Set............................................................................................... 158 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 158 Instruction Timing................................................................................................................. 158 Moving and Transferring Data.............................................................................................. 158 Arithmetic Operations........................................................................................................... 158 Logical and Rotate Operation.............................................................................................. 159 Rev. 1.20 5 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Branches and Control Transfer............................................................................................ 159 Bit Operations...................................................................................................................... 159 Table Read Operations........................................................................................................ 159 Other Operations.................................................................................................................. 159 Instruction Set Summary............................................................................. 160 Table Conventions................................................................................................................ 160 Instruction Definition.................................................................................... 162 Package Information.................................................................................... 171 24-pin SKDIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions......................................................................... 171 24-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions............................................................................ 174 24-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions.......................................................................... 175 28-pin SKDIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions......................................................................... 176 28-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions............................................................................ 177 28-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions.......................................................................... 178 44-pin QFP (10mm×10mm) Outline Dimensions................................................................. 179 Product Tape and Reel Specifications........................................................ 180 Reel Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 180 Carrier Tape Dimensions...................................................................................................... 181 Rev. 1.20 6 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Features CPU Features • Operating Voltage: fSYS= 8MHz: VLVR~5.5V fSYS= 12MHz: 2.7V~5.5V fSYS= 16MHz: 4.5V~5.5V • Power down and wake-up functions to reduce power consumption • Oscillator types: External 32.768kHz Crystal – LXT Internal RC – HIRC Internal 32kHz RC – LIRC • Multi-mode operation: NORMAL, SLOW, IDLE and SLEEP • All instructions executed in one or two instruction cycles • Table read instructions • 63 powerful instructions • Up to 8 subroutine nesting levels • Bit manipulation instruction Peripheral Features • Fully integrated 12 or 20 touch key functions -- require no external components • Flash Program Memory: 2K×15 or 4K×15 • RAM Data Memory: 256×8 or 384×8 • EEPROM Memory: 64×8 or 128×8 • Watchdog Timer function • Up to 38 bidirectional I/O lines • Two or three Timer Modules • Dual Time-Base functions for generation of fixed time interrupt signals • I2C and SPI interfaces • Low voltage reset function • Software controlled 4×14 or 4×22 LCD driver with 1/3 bias • Software controlled 6×8 or 8×14 LED driver Rev. 1.20 7 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver General Description These devices are a series of Flash Memory type 8-bit high performance RISC architecture microcontrollers with fully integrated touch key functions and LCD/LED drivers. With all touch key functions provided internally and with the convenience of Flash Memory multi-programming features, this device range has all the features to offer designers a reliable and easy means of implementing Touch Keys within their products applications. The touch key functions are fully integrated completely eliminating the need for external components. The inclusion of both LCD and LED driver functions allows for easy and cost effective solutions in applications that require to interface to these display types. In addition to the flash program memory, other memory includes an area of RAM Data Memory as well as an area of EEPROM memory for storage of non-volatile data such as serial numbers, calibration data etc. Protective features such as an internal Watchdog Timer, Low Voltage Reset and Low Voltage Detector functions coupled with excellent noise immunity and ESD protection ensure that reliable operation is maintained in hostile electrical environments. A choice of oscillator functions are provided including a fully integrated system oscillator which requires no external components for its implementation. The ability to operate and switch dynamically between a range of operating modes using different clock sources gives users the ability to optimise microcontroller operation and minimise power consumption. Easy communication with the outside world is provided using the internal I2C and SPI interfaces, while the inclusion of flexible I/O programming features, Timer Modules and many other features further enhance device functionality and flexibility. These touch key devices will find excellent use in a huge range of modern Touch Key product applications such as instrumentation, household appliances, electronically controlled tools to name but a few. Selection Table Part No. Internal Clock VDD BS85B12-3 8MHz 12MHz 16MHz VLVR ~ 8MHz ~ 5.5V 16MHz 2K×15 256×8 64×8 22 HIRC LIRC 2 12 4×14 6×8 1 4 24/28SKDIP /SOP 24/28SSOP BS85C20-3 8MHz 12MHz 16MHz VLVR ~ 8MHz ~ 5.5V 16MHz 4K×15 384×8 128×8 38 HIRC LIRC 3 20 4×22 8×14 1 8 28SKDIP /SOP 28SSOP 44QFP BS85C20-5 8MHz 12MHz 16MHz VLVR ~ 8MHz ~ 5.5V 16MHz 4K×15 384×8 128×8 38 HIRC LIRC LXT 3 20 4×22 8×14 1 8 28SKDIP /SOP 28SSOP 44QFP Rev. 1.20 System Program Data Data Oscillator Timer Touch LCD LED SPI/ I/O Stack Clock Memory Memory EEPROM Type Module Key Driver Driver I2C 8 Package August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Block Diagram Pin Assignment P C 0 /[T P 0 _ 0 ]/[S D O ]/S S E G 0 /K E Y 1 1 P C 1 /[T P 0 _ 1 ]/[S C K /S C L ]/S S E G 1 /K E Y 2 2 P C 2 /[T P 1 B _ 0 ]/[S D I/S D A ]/S S E G 2 /K E Y 3 3 2 4 2 3 2 2 P C 3 /[T P 1 B _ 1 ]/[S C S ]/S S E G 3 /K E Y 4 4 P C 4 /[T C K 0 ]/[IN T 0 ]/[T P 1 B _ 2 ]/S S E G 4 /K E Y 5 5 P C 5 /[T C K 1 ]/[IN T 1 ]/[T P 1 A ]/S S E G 5 /K E Y 6 6 P C 6 /[P C K ]/S S E G 6 /K E Y 7 7 P C 7 /P IN T /S S E G 7 /K E Y 8 8 K E Y 1 1 9 K E Y 1 2 1 0 V S S 1 1 V D D 1 2 2 1 2 0 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 P B 0 /T P 0 _ 0 /S C O M 0 P B 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /S C O M 1 P B 2 /T P 1 B _ 0 /S C O M 2 P B 3 /T P 1 B _ 1 /S C O M 3 P A 1 /T C K 1 /IN T 1 /S S E G 1 0 P A 4 /T C K 0 /IN T 0 /S S E G 1 1 P A 5 /S S E G 1 2 P A 6 /S S E G 1 3 P A 3 /S C S P A 0 /S D I/S D A P A 2 /S C K /S C L P A 7 /S D O P C 0 /[T P 0 _ 0 ]/[S D O ]/S S E G 0 /K E Y 1 1 2 8 P B 0 /T P 0 _ 0 /S C O M 0 P C 1 /[T P 0 _ 1 ]/[S C K ]/[S C L ]/S S E G 1 /K E Y 2 2 2 7 P B 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /S C O M 1 P C 2 /[T P 1 B _ 0 ]/[S D I]/[S D A ]/S S E G 2 /K E Y 3 3 2 6 P B 2 /T P 1 B _ 0 /S C O M 2 P C 3 /[T P 1 B _ 1 ]/[S C S ]/S S E G 3 /K E Y 4 4 2 5 P B 3 /T P 1 B _ 1 /S C O M 3 P C 4 /[T C K 0 ]/[IN T 0 ]/[T P 1 B _ 2 ]/S S E G 4 /K E Y 5 5 2 4 P B 4 /T P 1 B _ 2 /P C K /S S E G 8 P C 5 /[T C K 1 ]/[IN T 1 ]/[T P 1 A ]/S S E G 5 /K E Y 6 6 2 3 P B 5 /P IN T /T P 1 A /S S E G 9 P C 6 /[P C K ]/S S E G 6 /K E Y 7 7 2 2 P A 1 /T C K 1 /IN T 1 /S S E G 1 0 P C 7 /[P IN T ]/S S E G 7 /K E Y 8 8 2 1 P A 4 /T C K 0 /IN T 0 /S S E G 1 1 K E Y 9 9 2 0 P A 5 /S S E G 1 2 K E Y 1 0 1 0 1 9 P A 6 /S S E G 1 3 K E Y 1 1 1 1 1 8 P A 3 /S C S K E Y 1 2 1 2 1 7 P A 0 /S D I/S D A V S S 1 3 1 6 P A 2 /S C K /S C L V D D 1 4 1 5 P A 7 /S D O Rev. 1.20 9 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver P B 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /T P 2 _ 0 /S C O M 1 P C 2 /[T P 1 B _ 0 ]/[S D I]/[S D A ]/S S E G 2 /K E Y 3 3 2 6 P B 2 /T P 1 B _ 0 /T P 2 _ 1 /S C O M 2 P C 3 /[T P 1 B _ 1 ]/[S C S ]/S S E G 3 /K E Y 4 4 2 5 P B 3 /T P 1 B _ 1 /S C O M 3 P C 4 /[T C K 0 ]/[IN T 0 ]/[T P 1 B _ 2 ]/S S E G 4 /K E Y 5 5 2 4 P B 4 /T P 1 B _ 2 /P C K /S S E G 8 P C 5 /[T C K 1 ]/[IN T 1 ]/[T P 1 A ]/S S E G 5 /K E Y 6 6 2 3 P B 5 /P IN T /T P 1 A /S S E G 9 P C 6 /T C K 2 /[P C K ]/S S E G 6 /K E Y 7 7 2 2 P A 1 /T C K 1 /IN T 1 /S S E G 1 0 P C 7 /[P IN T ]/S S E G 7 /K E Y 8 8 2 1 P A 4 /T C K 0 /IN T 0 /S S E G 1 1 K E Y 9 9 2 0 P A 5 /S S E G 1 2 K E Y 1 0 1 0 1 9 P A 6 /S S E G 1 3 K E Y 1 1 1 1 1 8 P A 3 /S C S K E Y 1 2 1 2 1 7 P A 0 /S D I/S D A V S S 1 3 1 6 P A 2 /S C K /S C L V D D 1 4 1 5 P A 7 /S D O P P E 2 P E 1 P B 2 P B 0 /T P 0 _ 0 /S C O M 0 2 7 P B 2 8 2 C 0 /[T P 0 P 0 _ 1 ]/[S 1 B _ 0 ]/[S 3 /[T P 1 B 1 P P C 1 /[T P C 2 /[T P P C P C 0 /[T P 0 _ 0 ]/[S D O ]/S S E G 0 /K E Y 1 P C 1 /[T P 0 _ 1 ]/[S C K ]/[S C L ]/S S E G 1 /K E Y 2 /T P 1 B _ 0 /T P 2 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /T P 2 P B 0 /T P 0 E 3 /[S C K ]/[S C /[T P 2 _ 1 ]/[S C /[T P 2 _ 0 ]/[P C P E 0 /[P IN _ 0 ]/[S D O ]/S S C K ]/[S C L ]/S S D I]/[S D A ]/S S _ 1 ]/[S C S ]/S S _ 1 /S _ 0 /S _ 0 /S L ]/S S S ]/S S K ]/S S T ]/S S E G 0 E G 1 E G 2 E G 3 C O M 2 C O M 1 C O M 0 G 1 7 G 1 6 G 1 5 G 1 4 1 E E E E /K /K /K /K E Y E Y E Y E Y 3 4 2 P C 4 /[T C K 0 ]/[IN T 0 ]/[T P 1 B _ P C 5 /[T C K 1 ]/[IN T 1 ]/[T P 1 P C 6 /T C K 2 /[P C P C 7 /[P IN P D 2 ]/S A ]/S K ]/S T ]/S 0 /[T S E S E S E S E C K P D P D P D P D P D P D G 4 /K G 5 /K G 6 /K G 7 /K 2 ]/K E 1 /K E 2 /K E 3 /K E 4 /K E 5 /K E 6 /K E E Y 5 E Y 6 E Y 7 E Y 8 Y 1 3 Y 1 4 Y 1 5 Y 1 6 Y 1 7 Y 1 8 Y 1 9 4 4 4 3 4 2 4 1 4 0 3 9 3 8 3 7 3 6 3 5 3 4 1 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 4 3 0 5 2 9 6 7 2 8 2 7 8 2 6 9 1 0 1 1 2 5 2 4 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 P B 3 P B 4 P B 5 P B 6 P B 7 P E 4 P E 5 P A 1 P A 4 P A 5 P A 6 /T P /T P /P IN /S S /S S /[S D /[S D /T C /T C /S S /S S 1 B _ 1 /S C O 1 B _ 2 /P C K T /T P 1 A /S E G 2 0 E G 2 1 I]/[S D A ]/S O ]/S S E G K 1 /IN T 1 /S K 0 /IN T 0 /S E G 1 2 E G 1 3 M 3 /S S E G 8 S E G 9 S E G 1 8 1 9 S E G 1 0 S E G 1 1 P A 3 P A 0 P A 2 P A 7 V D D V S S K E Y K E Y K E Y K E Y P D 7 5 2 4 P B 4 /T P 1 B _ 2 /P C K /S S E G 8 P C 5 /[T C K 1 ]/[IN T 1 ]/[T P 1 A ]/S S E G 5 /K E Y 6 6 2 3 P B 5 /P IN T /T P 1 A /S S E G 9 P C 6 /T C K 2 /[P C K ]/S S E G 6 /K E Y 7 7 2 2 P A 1 /T C K 1 /IN T 1 /S S E G 1 0 P C 7 /[P IN T ]/S S E G 7 /K E Y 8 8 2 1 P A 4 /T C K 0 /IN T 0 /S S E G 1 1 K E Y 9 9 2 0 O S C 2 K E Y 1 0 1 0 1 9 O S C 1 K E Y 1 1 1 1 1 8 P A 3 /S C S K E Y 1 2 1 2 1 7 P A 0 /S D I/S D A V S S 1 3 1 6 P A 2 /S C K /S C L V D D 1 4 1 5 P A 7 /S D O P B 2 P B P C 4 /[T C K 0 ]/[IN T 0 ]/[T P 1 B _ 2 ]/S S E G 4 /K E Y 5 C S D I/S D A C K /S C L D O P B 3 /T P 1 B _ 1 /S C O M 3 /S /S /S /S 2 5 P P E 2 P E 1 4 2 P B 2 /T P 1 B _ 0 /T P 2 _ 1 /S C O M 2 P C 3 /[T P 1 B _ 1 ]/[S C S ]/S S E G 3 /K E Y 4 1 2 6 /T P 1 B _ 0 /T P 2 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /T P 2 P B 0 /T P 0 E 3 /[S C K ]/[S C /[T P 2 _ 1 ]/[S C /[T P 2 _ 0 ]/[P C P E 0 /[P IN _ 0 ]/[S D O ]/S S C K ]/[S C L ]/S S D I]/[S D A ]/S S _ 1 ]/[S C S ]/S S 3 C 0 /[T P 0 P 0 _ 1 ]/[S 1 B _ 0 ]/[S 3 /[T P 1 B P B 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /T P 2 _ 0 /S C O M 1 P C 2 /[T P 1 B _ 0 ]/[S D I]/[S D A ]/S S E G 2 /K E Y 3 P P C 1 /[T P C 2 /[T P P C P B 0 /T P 0 _ 0 /S C O M 0 2 7 E Y 2 0 2 8 2 0 1 1 1 1 9 /K P C 0 /[T P 0 _ 0 ]/[S D O ]/S S E G 0 /K E Y 1 P C 1 /[T P 0 _ 1 ]/[S C K ]/[S C L ]/S S E G 1 /K E Y 2 _ 1 /S _ 0 /S _ 0 /S L ]/S S S ]/S S K ]/S S T ]/S S E G 0 E G 1 E G 2 E G 3 E E E E /K /K /K /K C O M 2 C O M 1 C O M 0 G 1 7 G 1 6 G 1 5 G 1 4 E Y 1 E Y 2 E Y 3 E Y 4 P C 4 /[T C K 0 ]/[IN T 0 ]/[T P 1 B _ P C 5 /[T C K 1 ]/[IN T 1 ]/[T P 1 P C 6 /T C K 2 /[P C P C 7 /[P IN P D 2 ]/S A ]/S K ]/S T ]/S 0 /[T S E S E S E S E C K P D P D P D P D P D P D G 4 /K G 5 /K G 6 /K G 7 /K 2 ]/K E 1 /K E 2 /K E 3 /K E 4 /K E 5 /K E 6 /K E E Y E Y E Y E Y Y 1 Y 1 Y 1 Y 1 Y 1 Y 1 Y 1 4 4 4 3 4 2 4 1 4 0 3 9 3 8 3 7 3 6 3 5 3 4 5 6 1 5 6 3 3 1 4 3 0 5 3 2 9 6 7 7 2 8 2 7 8 8 9 3 3 3 2 7 8 4 2 2 6 9 1 0 1 1 2 5 2 4 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 P B 3 P B 4 P B 5 P B 6 P B 7 P E 4 P E 5 P A 1 P A 4 O S C O S C /T P /T P /P IN /S S /S S /[S D /[S D /T C /T C 2 1 1 B _ 1 /S C O 1 B _ 2 /P C K T /T P 1 A /S E G 2 0 E G 2 1 I]/[S D A ]/S O ]/S S E G K 1 /IN T 1 /S K 0 /IN T 0 /S M 3 /S S E G 8 S E G 9 S E G 1 8 1 9 S E G 1 0 S E G 1 1 P A 3 P A 0 P A 2 P A 7 V D D V S S K E Y K E Y K E Y K E Y P D 7 2 1 0 /S C /S D /S C /S D 1 1 1 9 /K S I/S D A K /S C L O E Y 2 0 Note: 1. Bracketed pin names indicate non-default pinout remapping locations. 2. If the pin-shared pin functions have multiple outputs simultaneously, its pin names at the right side of the " / " sign can be used for higher priority. Rev. 1.20 10 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Description The function of each pin is listed in the following table, however the details behind how each pin is configured is contained in other sections of the datasheet. BS85B12-3 Pin Name PA0/SDI/SDA Register Select I/T PA0 PAWU PAPU ST SDI SIMC0 ST SDA SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C data I/O PA1 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. Function PA1/TCK1/ TCK1 INT1/SSEG10 INT1 SSEG10 PA2 PA2/SCK/SCL PA3/SCS Timer Module 1 input — External interrupt 1 input SLCDCn — LCD PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. Software controlled LCD SEG NMOS I2C clock PA3 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SCS SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI slave select PA4 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. TM0C0 ST — Timer Module 0 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 0 input SLCDCn — LCD PAWU PAPU ST SLCDCn — PAWU PAPU ST SLCDCn — PA7 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SDO SIMC0 — CMOS SPI data output PA5 PA6 Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. LCD Software controlled LCD SEG PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP0_0 TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SCOM0 SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP0_1 TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SCOM1 SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP1B_0 TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O SCOM2 SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP1B_1 TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O SCOM3 SLCDCn — PB3 Rev. 1.20 — ST CMOS SPI serial clock PB2 PB3/TP1B_1/ SCOM3 ST INTC0 ST PB1 PB2/TP1B_0/ SCOM2 TM1C0 ST PB0 PB1/TP0_1/ SCOM1 SPI data input SIMC0 SSEG13 PB0/TP0_0/ SCOM0 — SIMC0 SSEG12 PA7/SDO CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SCK SSEG11 PA6/SSEG13 Description SCL PA4/TCK0/ TCK0 INT0/SSEG11 INT0 PA5/SSEG12 O/T LCD LCD LCD LCD Software controlled LCD COM Software controlled LCD COM Software controlled LCD COM Software controlled LCD COM 11 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Name Function Description PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. ST CMOS TM1 I/O PCK SIMC0 — CMOS Peripheral clock output PB5 PINT PB5/PINT/ TP1A/SSEG9 TP1A SSEG9 SLCDCn — PBPU ST MFI3 ST TMPCn ST LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Peripheral interrupt input CMOS TM1 I/O SLCDCn — PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP0_0 TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SDO SIMC0 — CMOS SPI data output PC0 LCD SSEG0 SLCDCn — LCD KEY1 TKMnC1 NS — PC1 TP0_1 PC1/TP0_1/ SCK SCK/SCL/ SCL SSEG1/KEY2 SSEG1 KEY2 PC2 TP1B_0 PC2/TP1B_0/ SDI SDI/SDA/ SSEG2/KEY3 SDA SSEG2 KEY3 PC3 PC3/TP1B_1/ TP1B_1 SCS/SSEG3/ SCS KEY4 SSEG3 Software controlled LCD SEG Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI clock SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C clock SLCDCn — TKMnC1 NS PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O SIMC0 ST SIMC0 ST LCD — — Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input SPI data input NMOS I2C data I/O SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O CMOS SPI slave select SIMC0 ST SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — PC4 PCPU ST TCK0 TM0C0 ST — Timer Module 0 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 0 input KEY4 PC4/TCK0/ INT0 INT0/TP1B_2/ SSEG4/KEY5 TP1B_2 SSEG4 KEY5 PC5 TCK1 PC5/TCK1/ INT1 INT1/TP1A/ SSEG5/KEY6 TP1A SSEG5 KEY6 PC6 PCK PC6/PCK/ SSEG6/KEY7 SSEG6 KEY7 Rev. 1.20 O/T TMPCn SSEG8 PC0/TP0_0/ SDO/SSEG0/ KEY1 I/T TP1B_2 PB4 PB4/TP1B_2/ PCK/SSEG8 Register Select Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST SLCDCn — CMOS TM1 I/O LCD TKMnC1 NS — PCPU ST Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TM1C0 ST — Timer Module 1 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 1 input TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. CMOS Peripheral clock output SIMC0 — SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input 12 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Name Register Select I/T PC7 PCPU ST PINT MFI3 ST — SLCDCn — LCD Function PC7/PINT/ SSEG7/KEY8 SSEG7 O/T Description CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. Peripheral interrupt input Software controlled LCD SEG KEY8 TKMnC1 NS — Touch key input KEY9 KEY9 — NS — Touch key input KEY10 KEY10 — NS — Touch key input KEY11 KEY11 — NS — Touch key input KEY12 KEY12 — NS — Touch key input VDD VDD — PWR — Power supply VSS VSS — PWR — Ground Note: I/T: Input type O/T: Output type Register Select: Indicates register which selects alternative function PWR: Power ST: Schmitt Trigger input CMOS: CMOS output NMOS: NMOS output LCD: LCD COM or SEG Vbias output NS: Non-standard input or output The pins in the table reflect that of the package with the largest number of pins. For this reason not all pins may exist on all package types. BS85C20-3 Pin Name Function PA0 PA0/SDI/SDA ST Description CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SIMC0 ST SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C data I/O PA1 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. TM1C0 ST — Timer Module 1 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 1 input SLCDCn — LCD PA2 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SCK SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI serial clock SCL SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C clock PA3 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SCS SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI slave select PA4 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. TM0C0 ST — Timer Module 0 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 0 input SLCDCn — LCD PA4/TCK0/ TCK0 INT0/SSEG11 INT0 SSEG11 Rev. 1.20 PAWU PAPU O/T SDA SSEG10 PA3/SCS I/T SDI PA1/TCK1/ TCK1 INT1/SSEG10 INT1 PA2/SCK/SCL Register Select — SPI data input Software controlled LCD SEG Software controlled LCD SEG 13 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Name PA5/SSEG12 Register Select I/T PAWU PAPU ST SLCDCn — PAWU PAPU ST SLCDCn — PA7 PAWU PAPU ST SDO SIMC0 — CMOS SPI data output PB0 PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP0_0 TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SCOM0 SLCDCn — Function PA5 SSEG12 PA6/SSEG13 PA6 SSEG13 PA7/SDO PB0/TP0_0/ SCOM0 Description CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. LCD Software controlled LCD COM PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O TP2_0 TMPCn ST CMOS TM2 I/O SCOM1 SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O TMPCn ST CMOS TM2 I/O PB1 PB1/TP0_1/ TP2_0/ SCOM1 O/T TP0_1 PB2 PB2/TP1B_0/ TP1B_0 TP2_1/ TP2_1 SCOM2 SCOM2 PB3 PB3/TP1B_1/ TP1B_1 SCOM3 SCOM3 LCD LCD Software controlled LCD COM SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. Software controlled LCD COM CMOS TM1 I/O TMPCn ST SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. PB4/TP1B_2/ TP1B_2 PCK/SSEG8 PCK TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O SIMC0 — CMOS Peripheral clock output SSEG8 SLCDCn — PBPU ST MFI3 ST TMPCn ST PB4 PB5 PINT PB5/PINT/ TP1A/SSEG9 TP1A SSEG9 PB6/SSEG20 PB7/SSEG21 PB6 SSEG20 PB7 SSEG21 PC0 TP0_0 PC0/TP0_0/ SDO/SSEG0/ SDO KEY1 SSEG0 KEY1 PC1 TP0_1 PC1/TP0_1/ SCK SCK/SCL/ SSEG1/KEY2 SCL SSEG1 KEY2 Rev. 1.20 SLCDCn — PBPU ST SLCDCn — PBPU ST LCD LCD Software controlled LCD COM Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Peripheral interrupt input CMOS TM1 I/O LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. SLCDCn — PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. LCD Software controlled LCD SEG TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SIMC0 — CMOS SPI data output SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI clock SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C clock SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input 14 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Name Function Register Select I/T O/T Description PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP1B_0 TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O PC2/TP1B_0/ SDI SDI/SDA/ SSEG2/KEY3 SDA SSEG2 SIMC0 ST SIMC0 ST PC2 KEY3 PC3 CMOS TM1 I/O CMOS SPI slave select SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — PC4 PCPU ST TCK0 TM0C0 ST — Timer Module 0 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 0 input TMPCn ST SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — PCPU ST TM1C0 ST — Timer Module 1 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 1 input TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O — LCD — PC6 PCPU ST TCK2 TM2C0 ST — SIMC0 — SLCDCn — LCD KEY7 TKMnC1 NS — PCPU ST MFI3 ST — SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — PDPU ST PD0 Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. SSEG6 KEY8 Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. NS PC7 Rev. 1.20 CMOS TM1 I/O TKMnC1 PCK Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. SLCDCn PINT PC7/PINT/ SSEG7/KEY8 SSEG7 PD6/KEY19 Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input ST KEY6 PD5/KEY18 — SIMC0 TCK1 PC5/TCK1/ INT1 INT1/TP1A/ SSEG5/KEY6 TP1A SSEG5 PD4/KEY17 LCD NS CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. PC5 PD3/KEY16 — TKMnC1 ST KEY5 PD2/KEY15 SLCDCn ST PC4/TCK0/ INT0 INT0/TP1B_2/ SSEG4/KEY5 TP1B_2 SSEG4 PD1/KEY14 NMOS I2C data I/O PCPU KEY4 PD0/TCK2/ KEY13 SPI data input TMPCn PC3/TP1B_1/ TP1B_1 SCS/SSEG3/ SCS KEY4 SSEG3 PC6/TCK2/ PCK/SSEG6/ KEY7 — Timer Module 2 input CMOS Peripheral clock output Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. Peripheral interrupt input Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TCK2 TM2C0 ST — Timer Module 2 input KEY13 TKMnC1 NS — Touch key input PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PD1 KEY14 PD2 KEY15 PD3 KEY16 PD4 KEY17 PD5 KEY18 PD6 KEY19 CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input 15 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Name PD7/KEY20 Function PD7 KEY20 PE0 PE0/PINT/ SSEG14 PINT SSEG14 PE1 TP2_0 PE1/TP2_0/ PCK/SSEG15 PCK SSEG15 PE2 PE2/TP2_1/ SCS/SSEG16 TP2_1 SCS Register Select I/T PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PEPU ST O/T Description CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. MFI3 ST — SLCDCn — LCD PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM2 I/O SIMC0 — CMOS Peripheral Clock Output SLCDCn — PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM2 I/O CMOS SPI select LCD Peripheral interrupt input Software controlled LCD SEG Software controlled LCD SEG SIMC0 ST SLCDCn — PE3 PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. SCK PE3/SCK/ SCL/SSEG17 SCL SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI serial clock SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C clock SSEG16 SSEG17 SLCDCn — PE4 PEPU ST SDI PE4/SDI/ SDA/SSEG18 SDA SIMC0 ST SIMC0 ST SSEG18 PE5 PE5/SDO/ SSEG19 SDO SSEG19 LCD LCD Software controlled LCD SEG Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — SPI data input NMOS I2C data I/O SLCDCn — PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. LCD CMOS SPI data output SIMC0 ST SLCDCn — LCD Software controlled LCD SEG Software controlled LCD SEG KEY9 KEY9 — NS — Touch key input KEY10 KEY10 — NS — Touch key input KEY11 KEY11 — NS — Touch key input KEY12 KEY12 — NS — Touch key input VDD VDD — PWR — Power supply VSS VSS — PWR — Ground Note: I/T: Input type O/T: Output type Register Select: Indicates register which selects alternative function PWR: Power ST: Schmitt Trigger input CMOS: CMOS output NMOS: NMOS output LCD: LCD COM or SEG Vbias output NS: Non-standard input or output The pins in the table reflect that of the package with the largest number of pins. For this reason not all pins may exist on all package types. Rev. 1.20 16 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver BS85C20-5 Pin Name Function PA0 PA0/SDI/SDA ST ST NMOS I2C data I/O PA1 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. TM1C0 ST — Timer Module 1 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 1 input SLCDCn — LCD PA2 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SCK SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI serial clock SCL SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C clock PA3 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SCS SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI slave select PA4 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. TM0C0 ST — Timer Module 0 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 0 input SLCDCn — LCD Software controlled LCD SEG — — OSC LXT Oscillator pin — LXT Oscillator pin OSC2 OSC2 OSC1 OSC1 — SPI data input Software controlled LCD SEG — OSC PA7 PAWU PAPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SDO SIMC0 — CMOS SPI data output PB0 PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP0_0 TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SCOM0 SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TP0_1 TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O TP2_0 TMPCn ST CMOS TM2 I/O SCOM1 SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O TMPCn ST CMOS TM2 I/O SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. CMOS TM1 I/O PB1 PB1/TP0_1/ TP2_0/ SCOM1 CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and wake-up. SIMC0 SSEG11 PB0/TP0_0/ SCOM0 ST Description SIMC0 PA4/TCK0/ TCK0 INT0/SSEG11 INT0 PA7/SDO PAWU PAPU O/T SDA SSEG10 PA3/SCS I/T SDI PA1/TCK1/ TCK1 INT1/SSEG10 INT1 PA2/SCK/SCL Register Select PB2 PB2/TP1B_0/ TP1B_0 TP2_1/ TP2_1 SCOM2 SCOM2 PB3 PB3/TP1B_1/ TP1B_1 SCOM3 SCOM3 LCD LCD LCD Software controlled LCD COM Software controlled LCD COM Software controlled LCD COM TMPCn ST SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. PB4/TP1B_2/ TP1B_2 PCK/SSEG8 PCK TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O SIMC0 — CMOS Peripheral clock output SSEG8 SLCDCn — PB4 Rev. 1.20 LCD LCD Software controlled LCD COM Software controlled LCD SEG 17 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Name Register Select I/T PB5 PBPU ST PINT MFI3 ST TMPCn ST Function PB5/PINT/ TP1A/SSEG9 TP1A SSEG9 PB6/SSEG20 PB7/SSEG21 PB6 SSEG20 PB7 SSEG21 PC0 TP0_0 PC0/TP0_0/ SDO/SSEG0/ SDO KEY1 SSEG0 KEY1 PC1 TP0_1 PC1/TP0_1/ SCK SCK/SCL/ SSEG1/KEY2 SCL SSEG1 KEY2 PC2 TP1B_0 PC2/TP1B_0/ SDI SDI/SDA/ SSEG2/KEY3 SDA SSEG2 KEY3 PC3 ST SLCDCn — PBPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Peripheral interrupt input CMOS TM1 I/O LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. SLCDCn — PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. LCD TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SIMC0 — CMOS SPI data output SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — Software controlled LCD SEG Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM0 I/O SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI clock SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C clock SLCDCn — TKMnC1 NS PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM1 I/O SIMC0 ST SIMC0 ST LCD — — Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input SPI data input NMOS I2C data I/O SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input PCPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. ST CMOS TM1 I/O SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI slave select SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — PC4 PCPU ST TCK0 TM0C0 ST — Timer Module 0 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 0 input KEY4 PC4/TCK0/ INT0 INT0/TP1B_2/ SSEG4/KEY5 TP1B_2 SSEG4 Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — PC5 PCPU ST TCK1 TM1C0 ST — Timer Module 1 input INTC0 ST — External interrupt 1 input TMPCn ST KEY5 PC5/TCK1/ INT1 INT1/TP1A/ SSEG5/KEY6 TP1A SSEG5 CMOS TM1 I/O Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. CMOS TM1 I/O SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS — PC6 PCPU ST TCK2 TM2C0 ST PCK SIMC0 — KEY6 Rev. 1.20 — PBPU Description TMPCn PC3/TP1B_1/ TP1B_1 SCS/SSEG3/ SCS KEY4 SSEG3 PC6/TCK2/ PCK/SSEG6/ KEY7 SLCDCn O/T Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Timer Module 2 input CMOS Peripheral clock output SSEG6 SLCDCn — LCD KEY7 TKMnC1 NS — Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input 18 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Name Register Select I/T PC7 PCPU ST PINT MFI3 ST — SLCDCn — LCD TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST Function PC7/PINT/ SSEG7/KEY8 SSEG7 KEY8 PD0 PD0/TCK2/ KEY13 PD1/KEY14 PD2/KEY15 PD3/KEY16 PD4/KEY17 PD5/KEY18 PD6/KEY19 PD7/KEY20 Description CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Peripheral interrupt input Software controlled LCD SEG Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TCK2 TM2C0 ST — Timer Module 2 input KEY13 TKMnC1 NS — Touch key input PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PD1 KEY14 PD2 KEY15 PD3 KEY16 PD4 KEY17 PD5 KEY18 PD6 KEY19 PD7 KEY20 PE0 PE0/PINT/ SSEG14 O/T PINT SSEG14 PE1 TP2_0 PE1/TP2_0/ PCK/SSEG15 PCK SSEG15 PE2 TP2_1 PE2/TP2_1/ SCS/SSEG16 SCS SSEG16 PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PDPU ST TKMnC1 NS PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — Touch key input CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. MFI3 ST — SLCDCn — LCD PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM2 I/O SIMC0 — CMOS Peripheral Clock Output SLCDCn — PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. TMPCn ST CMOS TM2 I/O SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI select SLCDCn — LCD LCD Peripheral interrupt input Software controlled LCD SEG Software controlled LCD SEG Software controlled LCD SEG PE3 PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. SCK PE3/SCK/ SCL/SSEG17 SCL SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI serial clock SIMC0 ST NMOS I2C clock SSEG17 SLCDCn — PE4 PEPU ST SDI PE4/SDI/ SDA/SSEG18 SDA SIMC0 ST SIMC0 ST SLCDCn — SSEG18 PE5/SDO/ SSEG19 LCD Software controlled LCD SEG CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. — SPI data input NMOS I2C data I/O LCD Software controlled LCD SEG PE5 PEPU ST CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up. SDO SIMC0 ST CMOS SPI data output SLCDCn — LCD KEY9 SSEG19 KEY9 — NS — Touch key input KEY10 KEY10 — NS — Touch key input KEY11 KEY11 — NS — Touch key input KEY12 KEY12 — NS — Touch key input Rev. 1.20 Software controlled LCD SEG 19 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin Name Function Register Select I/T O/T Description VDD VDD — PWR — Power supply VSS VSS — PWR — Ground Note: I/T: Input type O/T: Output type Register Select: Indicates register which selects alternative function PWR: Power ST: Schmitt Trigger input CMOS: CMOS output NMOS: NMOS output LCD: LCD COM or SEG Vbias output NS: Non-standard input or output The pins in the table reflect that of the package with the largest number of pins. For this reason not all pins may exist on all package types. Absolute Maximum Ratings Supply Voltage.................................................................................................VSS−0.3V to VSS+6.0V Input Voltage...................................................................................................VSS−0.3V to VDD+0.3V Storage Temperature.....................................................................................................-50˚C to 125˚C Operating Temperature...................................................................................................-40˚C to 85˚C IOH Total...................................................................................................................................-100mA IOL Total.................................................................................................................................... 100mA Total Power Dissipation ......................................................................................................... 500mW Note: These are stress ratings only. Stresses exceeding the range specified under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause substantial damage to these devices. Functional operation of these devices at other conditions beyond those listed in the specification is not implied and prolonged exposure to extreme conditions may affect devices reliability. Rev. 1.20 20 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver D.C. Characteristics Ta= 25˚C Symbol VDD Parameter Operating Voltage (HIRC) Test Conditions VDD — 3V 5V IDD1 Operating Current (HIRC), (fSYS=fH) 3V 5V 5V IDD2 Operating Current (LIRC), (fSYS=fL) IIDLE01 IDLE0 Mode Standby Current (LXT on) 3V 5V 3V 5V 3V 5V IIDLE02 IDLE0 Mode Standby Current (LIRC on) 3V 5V 3V IIDLE03 IDLE0 Mode Standby Current (LXT and LIRC on) 5V 3V 5V IIDLE1 ISLEEP IDLE1 Mode Standby Current SLEEP1 Mode Standby Current 3V 5V 3V 5V VIL Input Low Voltage for I/O Ports or Input Pins 5V VIH Input High Voltage for I/O Ports or Input Pins 5V VOL1 Output Low Voltage I/O Port Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit fSYS=8MHz VLVR — 5.5 V fSYS=12MHz 2.7 — 5.5 V fSYS=16MHz 4.5 — 5.5 V No load, fH=8MHz, WDT enable — 1.2 1.8 mA — 2.7 4.1 mA No load, fH=12MHz, WDT enable — 1.9 2.9 mA — 4.2 6.3 mA — 5.6 8.4 mA No load, fH=16MHz, WDT enable No load, fL=32kHz, WDT enable — 15 30 µA — 30 50 µA No load, WDT enable, LXTLP=0 — 5 10 µA — 18 30 µA — 2.5 5.0 µA — 6 10 µA — 1.5 3.0 µA — 3.0 6.0 µA — 6.5 13 µA — 13 26 µA — 6 12 µA — 12 24 µA — 0.9 1.4 mA — 1.6 2.4 mA — 1.5 3.0 µA — 2.5 5.0 µA 0 — 1.5 V 0 — 0.2VDD V 3.5 — 5.0 V No load, WDT enable, LXTLP=1 No load, LVR disable No load, WDT enable, LXTLP=0 No load, WDT enable, LXTLP=1 No load, LVR disable, fSYS=12MHz on No load, LVR disable — — — 0.8VDD — VDD V 3V IOL=9mA — — 0.3 V 5V IOL=20mA — — 0.5 V 3V IOL=18mA — — 0.3 V 5V IOL=40mA — — 0.5 V 3V IOH=-3.2mA 2.7 — — V 5V IOH=-7.4mA 4.5 — — V — VOL2 Output Low Voltage I/O Port (PB) (High Current Enable) VOH1 Output High Voltage I/O Port VOH2 Output High Voltage I/O Port (PA, PE) (High Current Enable) 3V IOH=-6.4mA 2.7 — — V 5V IOH=-15.0mA 4.5 — — V VLVR LVR Voltage Level — LVR Enable -5% 2.55 +5% V LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.7V -5% 2.70 +5% V LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.0V -5% 3.00 +5% V LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.3V -5% 3.30 +5% V LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.6V -5% 3.60 +5% V LVDEN=1, VLVD=4.2V -5% 4.20 +5% V NORMAL or SLOW Mode — 2 5 µA IDLE or SLEEP Mode — 15 30 µA VLVD ILVD Rev. 1.20 LVD Voltage Level Additional Power Consumption if LVD is Used — — 21 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Symbol ISCOM ISSEG VSSOM VSSEG RPH Parameter SCOM Operating Current SSEG Operating Current Voltage for LCD SCOM Voltage for LCD SSEG Pull-high Resistance for I/O Ports Test Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit ISEL[1:0]=00 17.5 25.0 32.5 µA ISEL[1:0]=01 35 50 65 µA ISEL[1:0]=10 70 100 130 µA ISEL[1:0]=11 140 200 260 µA ISEL[1:0]=00 17.5 25.0 32.5 µA ISEL[1:0]=01 35 50 65 µA ISEL[1:0]=10 70 100 130 µA ISEL[1:0]=11 140 200 260 µA 1/3 VDD -3% 0.33 +3% VDD VDD 5V 5V 5V 5V Conditions 2/3 VDD -3% 0.67 +3% VDD 1/3 VDD -3% 0.33 +3% VDD 2/3 VDD -3% 0.67 +3% VDD 20 60 100 kΩ 10 30 50 kΩ 3V — 5V A.C. Characteristics Ta= 25˚C Symbol fCPU Parameter Operating Clock Test Conditions Min. Typ. VLVR~5.5V DC 2.7V~5.5V DC DC — 16 MHz -2% 8 +2% MHz VDD — Conditions 4.5V~5.5V 3V/5V Ta=25˚C Rev. 1.20 — 8 MHz — 12 MHz -2% 12 +2% MHz Ta=25˚C -2% 16 +2% MHz MHz 3V/5V Ta=0~70˚C -4% 8 +3% 3V/5V Ta=0~70˚C -4% 12 +3% MHz Ta=0~70˚C -4% 16 +3% MHz 2.5V~ Ta=0~70˚C 4.0V -9% 8 +6% MHz 3.0V~ Ta=0~70˚C 5.5V -5% 8 +12% MHz 2.7V~ Ta=0~70˚C 4.0V -9% 12 +5% MHz 3.0V~ Ta=0~70˚C 5.5V -5% 12 +11% MHz 4.5V~ Ta=0~70˚C 5.5V -5% 16 +5% MHz 2.5V~ Ta=-40˚C~85˚C 4.0V -12% 8 +6% MHz 3.0V~ Ta=-40˚C~85˚C 5.5V -8% 8 +12% MHz 2.7V~ Ta=-40˚C~85˚C 4.0V -13% 12 +5% MHz 3.0V~ Ta=-40˚C~85˚C 5.5V -8% 12 +11% MHz 4.5V~ Ta=-40˚C~85˚C 5.5V -7% 16 +5% MHz 5V System Clock (HIRC) Unit 3V/5V Ta=25˚C 5V fHIRC Max. 22 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Symbol Test Conditions Parameter fLIRC System Clock (LIRC) VDD Conditions 5V — 2.2V~ Ta=-40˚C~85˚C 5.5V Min. Typ. Max. Unit -10% 32 +10% kHz -50% 32 +60% kHz fTIMER Timer Input Pin Frequency — — — — 1 fSYS tINT Interrupt Pulse Width — — 1 — — µs tLVR Low Voltage Width to Reset — — 60 120 240 µs tLVD Low Voltage Width to Interrupt — — 180 240 360 µs tLVDS LVDO Stable Time — — 15 — — µs tEERD EEPROM Read Time — — — 2 4 tSYS tEEWR EEPROM Write Time — — — 2 4 ms tSST System Start-up Timer Period (Wake-up from HALT) — fSYS=HIRC — 15~16 — fSYS=LIRC — 1~2 — tSYS Note: 1. tSYS=1/fSYS 2. To maintain the accuracy of the internal HIRC oscillator frequency, a 0.1µF decoupling capacitor should be connected between VDD and VSS and located as close to the device as possible. Power-on Reset Characteristics Ta= 25˚C Symbol Test Conditions Parameter VDD Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit VPOR VDD Start Voltage to Ensure Power-on Reset — — — — 100 mV RPOR AC VDD Raising Rate to Ensure Power-on Reset — — 0.035 — — V/ms tPOR Minimum Time for VDD Stays at VPOR to Ensure Power-on Reset — — 1 — — ms Rev. 1.20 23 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Oscillator Temperature/Frequency Characteristics The following characteristic graphics depicts typical oscillator behavior. The data presented here is a statistical summary of data gathered on units from different lots over a period of time. This is for information only and the figures were not tested during manufacturing. In some of the graphs, the data exceeding the specified operating range are shown for information purposes only. The device will operate properly only within the specified range. Internal RC -- 8MHz (3V) 8.300 8.200 8.100 fSYS (MHz) 8.000 7.900 2.5V 2.7V 3.0V 4.0V 7.800 7.700 7.600 7.500 7.400 7.300 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Ta(°C) Internal RC -- 8MHz (5V) 8.800 8.600 fSYS (MHz) 8.400 3.0V 4.0V 4.5V 4.75V 5.0V 5.25V 5.5V 8.200 8.000 7.800 7.600 7.400 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Ta(°C) Rev. 1.20 24 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Internal RC -- 12MHz (3V) 12.400 12.200 12.000 fSYS (MHz) 11.800 2.7V 3.0V 4.0V 11.600 11.400 11.200 11.000 10.800 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Ta(°C) Internal RC -- 12MHz (5V) 13.000 12.800 12.600 3.0V 4.0V 4.5V 4.75V 5.0V 5.25V 5.5V fSYS (MHz) 12.400 12.200 12.000 11.800 11.600 11.400 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Ta(°C) Rev. 1.20 25 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Internal RC -- 16MHz (5V) 16.400 16.300 16.200 16.100 fSYS (MHz) 16.000 4.5V 4.75V 5.0V 5.25V 5.5V 15.900 15.800 15.700 15.600 15.500 15.400 15.300 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Ta(°C) System Architecture A key factor in the high-performance features of the Holtek range of microcontroller is attributed to their internal system architecture. The range of devices take advantage of the usual features found within RISC microcontroller providing increased speed of operation and enhanced performance. The pipelining scheme is implemented in such a way that instruction fetching and instruction execution are overlapped, hence instructions are effectively executed in one cycle, with the exception of branch or call instructions. An 8-bit wide ALU is used in practically all instruction set operations, which carries out arithmetic operations, logic operations, rotation, increment, decrement, branch decisions, etc. The internal data path is simplified by moving data through the Accumulator and the ALU. Certain internal registers are implemented in the Data Memory and can be directly or indirectly addressed. The simple addressing methods of these registers along with additional architectural features ensure that a minimum of external components is required to provide a functional I/O control system with maximum reliability and flexibility. This makes the device suitable for low-cost, high-volume production for controller applications. Clocking and Pipelining The main system clock, derived from either a high or low speed oscillator is subdivided into four internally generated non-overlapping clocks, T1~T4. The Program Counter is incremented at the beginning of the T1 clock during which time a new instruction is fetched. The remaining T2~T4 clocks carry out the decoding and execution functions. In this way, one T1~T4 clock cycle forms one instruction cycle. Although the fetching and execution of instructions takes place in consecutive instruction cycles, the pipelining structure of the microcontroller ensures that instructions are effectively executed in one instruction cycle. The exception to this are instructions where the contents of the Program Counter are changed, such as subroutine calls or jumps, in which case the instruction will take one more instruction cycle to execute. Rev. 1.20 26 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver System Clocking and Pipelining Instruction Fetching For instructions involving branches, such as jump or call instructions, two machine cycles are required to complete instruction execution. An extra cycle is required as the program takes one cycle to first obtain the actual jump or call address and then another cycle to actually execute the branch. The requirement for this extra cycle should be taken into account by programmers in timing sensitive applications. Program Counter During program execution, the Program Counter is used to keep track of the address of the next instruction to be executed. It is automatically incremented by one each time an instruction is executed except for instructions, such as "JMP" or "CALL" that demand a jump to a non-consecutive Program Memory address. Only the lower 8 bits, known as the Program Counter Low Register, are directly addressable by the application program. When executing instructions requiring jumps to non-consecutive addresses such as a jump instruction, a subroutine call, interrupt or reset, etc., the microcontroller manages program control by loading the required address into the Program Counter. For conditional skip instructions, once the condition has been met, the next instruction, which has already been fetched during the present instruction execution, is discarded and a dummy cycle takes its place while the correct instruction is obtained. The lower byte of the Program Counter, known as the Program Counter Low register or PCL, is available for program control and is a readable and writeable register. By transferring data directly into this register, a short program jump can be executed directly, however, as only this low byte is available for manipulation, the jumps are limited to the present page of memory, that is 256 locations. When such program jumps are executed it should also be noted that a dummy cycle will be inserted. Manipulating the PCL register may cause program branching, so an extra cycle is needed to pre-fetch. Rev. 1.20 27 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Stack This is a special part of the memory which is used to save the contents of the Program Counter only. The stack has multiple levels depending upon the device and is neither part of the data nor part of the program space, and is neither readable nor writeable. The activated level is indexed by the Stack Pointer, and is neither readable nor writeable. At a subroutine call or interrupt acknowledge signal, the contents of the Program Counter are pushed onto the stack. At the end of a subroutine or an interrupt routine, signaled by a return instruction, RET or RETI, the Program Counter is restored to its previous value from the stack. After a device reset, the Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack. If the stack is full and an enabled interrupt takes place, the interrupt request flag will be recorded but the acknowledge signal will be inhibited. When the Stack Pointer is decremented, by RET or RETI, the interrupt will be serviced. This feature prevents stack overflow allowing the programmer to use the structure more easily. However, when the stack is full, a CALL subroutine instruction can still be executed which will result in a stack overflow. Precautions should be taken to avoid such cases which might cause unpredictable program branching. If the stack is overflow, the first Program Counter save in the stack will be lost. Device Stack Levels BS85B12-3 4 BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 8 P ro g ra m T o p o f S ta c k S ta c k L e v e l 1 S ta c k L e v e l 2 S ta c k P o in te r B o tto m C o u n te r S ta c k L e v e l 3 o f S ta c k P ro g ra m M e m o ry S ta c k L e v e l N Arithmetic and Logic Unit – ALU The arithmetic-logic unit or ALU is a critical area of the microcontroller that carries out arithmetic and logic operations of the instruction set. Connected to the main microcontroller data bus, the ALU receives related instruction codes and performs the required arithmetic or logical operations after which the result will be placed in the specified register. As these ALU calculation or operations may result in carry, borrow or other status changes, the status register will be correspondingly updated to reflect these changes. The ALU supports the following functions: • Arithmetic operations: ADD, ADDM, ADC, ADCM, SUB, SUBM, SBC, SBCM, DAA • Logic operations: AND, OR, XOR, ANDM, ORM, XORM, CPL, CPLA • Rotation RRA, RR, RRCA, RRC, RLA, RL, RLCA, RLC • Increment and Decrement INCA, INC, DECA, DEC • Branch decision, JMP, SZ, SZA, SNZ, SIZ, SDZ, SIZA, SDZA, CALL, RET, RETI Rev. 1.20 28 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Flash Program Memory The Program Memory is the location where the user code or program is stored. For this device series the Program Memory is Flash type, which means it can be programmed and re-programmed a large number of times, allowing the user the convenience of code modification on the same device. By using the appropriate programming tools, these Flash devices offer users the flexibility to conveniently debug and develop their applications while also offering a means of field programming and updating. Structure The Program Memory has a capacity of 2K×15 bits or 4K×15 bits. The Program Memory is addressed by the Program Counter and also contains data, table information and interrupt entries. Table data, which can be setup in any location within the Program Memory, is addressed by a separate table pointer register. Device Capacity BS85B12-3 2K×15 BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 4K×15 Special Vectors Within the Program Memory, certain locations are reserved for the reset and interrupts. The location 000H is reserved for use by the device reset for program initialisation. After a device reset is initiated, the program will jump to this location and begin execution. Look-up Table Any location within the Program Memory can be defined as a look-up table where programmers can store fixed data. To use the look-up table, the table pointer must first be setup by placing the address of the look up data to be retrieved in the table pointer register, TBLP and TBHP. These registers define the total address of the look-up table. After setting up the table pointer, the table data can be retrieved from the Program Memory using the "TABRD[m]" or "TABRDL[m]" instructions, respectively. When the instruction is executed, the lower order table byte from the Program Memory will be transferred to the user defined Data Memory register [m] as specified in the instruction. The higher order table data byte from the Program Memory will be transferred to the TBLH special register. Any unused bits in this transferred higher order byte will be read as "0". The accompanying diagram illustrates the addressing data flow of the look-up table. Rev. 1.20 29 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver A d d re s s L a s t p a g e o r T B H P R e g is te r T B L P R e g is te r D a ta 1 5 b its R e g is te r T B L H U s e r S e le c te d R e g is te r H ig h B y te L o w B y te Table Program Example The following example using the BS85B12-3 shows how the table pointer and table data is defined and retrieved from the microcontroller. This example uses raw table data located in the Program Memory which is stored there using the ORG statement. The value at this ORG statement is "700H" which refers to the start address of the last page within the 2K words Program Memory of the device. The table pointer is setup here to have an initial value of "06H". This will ensure that the first data read from the data table will be at the Program Memory address "706H" or 6 locations after the start of the last page. Note that the value for the table pointer is referenced to the first address of the present page if the "TABRD [m]" instruction is being used. The high byte of the table data which in this case is equal to zero will be transferred to the TBLH register automatically when the "TABRD [m]" instruction is executed. Because the TBLH register is a read-only register and cannot be restored, care should be taken to ensure its protection if both the main routine and Interrupt Service Routine use table read instructions. If using the table read instructions, the Interrupt Service Routines may change the value of the TBLH and subsequently cause errors if used again by the main routine. As a rule it is recommended that simultaneous use of the table read instructions should be avoided. However, in situations where simultaneous use cannot be avoided, the interrupts should be disabled prior to the execution of any main routine table-read instructions. Note that all table related instructions require two instruction cycles to complete their operation. Tempreg1 db ? ; temporary register #1 tempreg2 db ? ; temporary register #2 : : mov a,06h ; initialise low table pointer - note that this address mov tblp,a ; is referenced mov a,07h ; initialise high table pointer mov tbhp,a : : tabrd tempreg1 ; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer data at ; program memory address "706H" transferred to tempreg1 and TBLH dec tblp ; reduce value of table pointer by one tabrd tempreg2 ; ; ; ; : : org 700h ; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer data at program memory address "705H" transferred to tempreg2 and TBLH in this example the data "1AH" is transferred to tempreg1 and data "0FH" to register tempreg2 sets initial address of program memory dc 00Ah, 00Bh, 00Ch, 00Dh, 00Eh, 00Fh, 01Ah, 01Bh : : Rev. 1.20 30 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver In Circuit Programming The provision of Flash type Program Memory provides the user with a means of convenient and easy upgrades and modifications to their programs on the same device. As an additional convenience, Holtek has provided a means of programming the microcontroller incircuit using a 5-pin interface. This provides manufacturers with the possibility of manufacturing their circuit boards complete with a programmed or un-programmed microcontroller, and then programming or upgrading the program at a later stage. This enables product manufacturers to easily keep their manufactured products supplied with the latest program releases without removal and reinsertion of the device. The Holtek Flash MCU to Writer Programming Pin correspondence table is as follows: Holtek Writer Device Pin Name Pin Name SDATA PA0 Serial Address and data -- read/write SCLK PA2 Address and data serial clock input VPP PA7 Reset input VDD VDD Power Supply (5.0V) VSS VSS Ground Pin Description The Program Memory and EEPROM data memory can both be programmed serially in-circuit using this 5-wire interface. Data is downloaded and uploaded serially on a single pin with an additional line for the clock. Two additional lines are required for the power supply and one line for the reset. The technical details regarding the in-circuit programming of the devices are beyond the scope of this document and will be supplied in supplementary literature. During the programming process the PA7 pin will be held low by the programmer disabling the normal operation of the microcontroller and taking control of the PA0 and PA2 I/O pins for data and clock programming purposes. The user must there take care to ensure that no other outputs are connected to these two pins. W r ite r C o n n e c to r S ig n a ls M C U V D D V D D V P P P A 7 S D A T A P A 0 S C L K P A 2 V S S V S S * * P r o g r a m m in g P in s * T o o th e r C ir c u it Note: * may be resistor or capacitor. The resistance of * must be greater than 1k or the capacitance of * must be less than 1nF. Rev. 1.20 31 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver RAM Data Memory The Data Memory is a volatile area of 8-bit wide RAM internal memory and is the location where temporary information is stored. Structure Divided into two sections, the first of these is an area of RAM, known as the Special Function Data Memory. Here are located registers which are necessary for correct operation of the device. Many of these registers can be read from and written to directly under program control, however, some remain protected from user manipulation. Device Capacity Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 BS85B12-3 256×8 80H~FFH 80H~FFH — BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 384×8 80H~FFH 80H~FFH 80H~FFH General Purpose Data Memory The second area of Data Memory is known as the General Purpose Data Memory, which is reserved for general purpose use. All locations within this area are read and write accessible under program control. The overall Data Memory is subdivided into two or three banks. The Special Purpose Data Memory registers are accessible in all banks, with the exception of the EEC register at address 40H, which is only accessible in Bank 1. Switching between the different Data Memory banks is achieved by setting the Bank Pointer to the correct value. The start address of the Data Memory for all devices is the address 00H. Special Function Register Description Most of the Special Function Register details will be described in the relevant functional section, however several registers require a separate description in this section. Indirect Addressing Registers – IAR0, IAR1 The Indirect Addressing Registers, IAR0 and IAR1, although having their locations in normal RAM register space, do not actually physically exist as normal registers. The method of indirect addressing for RAM data manipulation uses these Indirect Addressing Registers and Memory Pointers, in contrast to direct memory addressing, where the actual memory address is specified. Actions on the IAR0 and IAR1 registers will result in no actual read or write operation to these registers but rather to the memory location specified by their corresponding Memory Pointers, MP0 or MP1. Acting as a pair, IAR0 and MP0 can together access data from Bank 0 while the IAR1 and MP1 register pair can access data from any bank. As the Indirect Addressing Registers are not physically implemented, reading the Indirect Addressing Registers indirectly will return a result of "00H" and writing to the registers indirectly will result in no operation. Rev. 1.20 32 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Memory Pointers – MP0, MP1 Two Memory Pointers, known as MP0 and MP1 are provided. These Memory Pointers are physically implemented in the Data Memory and can be manipulated in the same way as normal registers providing a convenient way with which to address and track data. When any operation to the relevant Indirect Addressing Registers is carried out, the actual address that the microcontroller is directed to, is the address specified by the related Memory Pointer. MP0, together with Indirect Addressing Register, IAR0, are used to access data from Bank 0, while MP1 and IAR1 are used to access data from all banks according to BP register. Direct Addressing can only be used with Bank 0, all other Banks must be addressed indirectly using MP1 and IAR1. Note that for this series of devices, the Memory Pointers, MP0 and MP1, are both 8-bit registers and used to access the Data Memory together with their corresponding indirect addressing registers IAR0 and IAR1. The following example shows how to clear a section of four Data Memory locations already defined as locations adres1 to adres4. Indirect Addressing Program Example data .section ”data“ adres1 db ? adres2 db ? adres3 db ? adres4 db ? block db ? code .section at 0 ”code“ org 00h start: mov a,04h ; setup size of block mov block,a mov a,offset adres1 ; Accumulator loaded with first RAM address mov mp0,a ; setup memory pointer with first RAM address loop: clr IAR0 ; clear the data at address defined by MP0 inc mp0 ; increment memory pointer sdz block ; check if last memory location has been cleared jmp loop continue: The important point to note here is that in the example shown above, no reference is made to specific RAM addresses. Rev. 1.20 33 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Special Purpose Data Memory Note: The Reserved bytes shown in the table must not be modified by the user. Rev. 1.20 34 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver General Purpose Data Memory Bank Pointer – BP For this series of devices, the Data Memory is divided into two or three banks. Selecting the required Data Memory area is achieved using the Bank Pointer. Bit 0 and 1 is used to select Data Memory Banks 0~2. The Data Memory is initialised to Bank 0 after a reset, except for a WDT time-out reset in the Power Down Mode, in which case, the Data Memory bank remains unaffected. It should be noted that the Special Function Data Memory is not affected by the bank selection, which means that the Special Function Registers can be accessed from within any bank. Directly addressing the Data Memory will always result in Bank 0 being accessed irrespective of the value of the Bank Pointer. Accessing data from banks other than Bank 0 must be implemented using indirect addressing. BP Register – BS85B12-3 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — — DMBP0 R/W — — — — — — — R/W POR — — — — — — — 0 Bit 7~1 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 0 DMBP0: select data memory banks 0: bank 0 1: bank 1 BP Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — DMBP1 DMBP0 R/W — — — — — — R/W R/W POR — — — — — — 0 0 Bit 7~2 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 DMBP1, DMBP0: select data memory banks 00: bank 0 01: bank 1 10: bank 2 11: undefined 35 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Accumulator – ACC The Accumulator is central to the operation of any microcontroller and is closely related with operations carried out by the ALU. The Accumulator is the place where all intermediate results from the ALU are stored. Without the Accumulator it would be necessary to write the result of each calculation or logical operation such as addition, subtraction, shift, etc., to the Data Memory resulting in higher programming and timing overheads. Data transfer operations usually involve the temporary storage function of the Accumulator; for example, when transferring data between one user defined register and another, it is necessary to do this by passing the data through the Accumulator as no direct transfer between two registers is permitted. Program Counter Low Register – PCL To provide additional program control functions, the low byte of the Program Counter is made accessible to programmers by locating it within the Special Purpose area of the Data Memory. By manipulating this register, direct jumps to other program locations are easily implemented. Loading a value directly into this PCL register will cause a jump to the specified Program Memory location, however, as the register is only 8-bit wide, only jumps within the current Program Memory page are permitted. When such operations are used, note that a dummy cycle will be inserted. Look-up Table Registers – TBLP, TBHP, TBLH These three special function registers are used to control operation of the look-up table which is stored in the Program Memory. TBLP and TBHP are the table pointer and indicates the location where the table data is located. Their value must be setup before any table read commands are executed. Their value can be changed, for example using the "INC" or "DEC" instructions, allowing for easy table data pointing and reading. TBLH is the location where the high order byte of the table data is stored after a table read data instruction has been executed. Note that the lower order table data byte is transferred to a user defined location. Status Register – STATUS This 8-bit register contains the zero flag (Z), carry flag (C), auxiliary carry flag (AC), overflow flag (OV), power down flag (PDF), and watchdog time-out flag (TO). These arithmetic/logical operation and system management flags are used to record the status and operation of the microcontroller. With the exception of the TO and PDF flags, bits in the status register can be altered by instructions like most other registers. Any data written into the status register will not change the TO or PDF flag. In addition, operations related to the status register may give different results due to the different instruction operations. The TO flag can be affected only by a system power-up, a WDT time-out or by executing the "CLR WDT" or "HALT" instruction. The PDF flag is affected only by executing the "HALT" or "CLR WDT" instruction or during a system power-up. The Z, OV, AC and C flags generally reflect the status of the latest operations. • C is set if an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not take place during a subtraction operation; otherwise C is cleared. C is also affected by a rotate through carry instruction. • AC is set if an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow from the high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction; otherwise AC is cleared. • Z is set if the result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero; otherwise Z is cleared. • OV is set if an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the highest-order bit, or vice versa; otherwise OV is cleared. Rev. 1.20 36 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver • PDF is cleared by a system power-up or executing the "CLR WDT" instruction. PDF is set by executing the "HALT" instruction. • TO is cleared by a system power-up or executing the "CLR WDT" or "HALT" instruction. TO is set by a WDT time-out. In addition, on entering an interrupt sequence or executing a subroutine call, the status register will not be pushed onto the stack automatically. If the contents of the status registers are important and if the subroutine can corrupt the status register, precautions must be taken to correctly save it. STATUS Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — TO PDF OV Z AC C R/W — — R R R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — — 0 0 x x x x "x" unknown Rev. 1.20 Bit 7~6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5 TO: watchdog time-out flag 0: After power up or executing the "CLR WDT"or "HALT" instruction 1: A watchdog time-out occurred. Bit 4 PDF: power down flag 0: After power up or executing the "CLR WDT" instruction 1: By executing the "HALT" instruction Bit 3 OV: Overflow flag 0: no overflow 1: an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the highest-order bit or vice versa. Bit 2 Z: Zero flag 0: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is not zero 1: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero Bit 1 AC: Auxiliary flag 0: no auxiliary carry 1: an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow from the high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction Bit 0 C: Carry flag 0: no carry-out 1: an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not take place during a subtraction operation C is also affected by a rotate through carry instruction. 37 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver EEPROM Data Memory The devices contain an area of internal EEPROM Data Memory. EEPROM, which stands for Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory, is by its nature a non-volatile form of re-programmable memory, with data retention even when its power supply is removed. By incorporating this kind of data memory, a whole new host of application possibilities are made available to the designer. The availability of EEPROM storage allows information such as product identification numbers, calibration values, specific user data, system setup data or other product information to be stored directly within the product microcontroller. The process of reading and writing data to the EEPROM memory has been reduced to a very trivial affair. EEPROM Data Memory Structure The EEPROM Data Memory capacity is 64×8 or 128×8 bits for this series of devices. Unlike the Program Memory and RAM Data Memory, the EEPROM Data Memory is not directly mapped into memory space and is therefore not directly addressable in the same way as the other types of memory. Read and Write operations to the EEPROM are carried out in single byte operations using an address and data register in Bank 0 and a single control register in Bank 1. Device Capacity Address BS85B12-3 64×8 00H ~ 3FH BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 128×8 00H ~ 7FH EEPROM Registers Three registers control the overall operation of the internal EEPROM Data Memory. These are the address register, EEA, the data register, EED and a single control register, EEC. As both the EEA and EED registers are located in Bank 0, they can be directly accessed in the same was as any other Special Function Register. The EEC register however, being located in Bank1, cannot be addressed directly and can only be read from or written to indirectly using the MP1 Memory Pointer and Indirect Addressing Register, IAR1. Because the EEC control register is located at address 40H in Bank 1, the MP1 Memory Pointer must first be set to the value 40H and the Bank Pointer register, BP, set to the value, 01H, before any operations on the EEC register are executed. EEPROM Register List • BS85B12-3 Name Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EEA — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 EED D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 EEC — — — — WREN WR RDEN RD • BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Name Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EEA — D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 EED D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 EEC — — — — WREN WR RDEN RD 38 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver EEA Register • BS85B12-3 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — — x x x x x x "x" unknown Bit 7~6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5~0 Data EEPROM address Data EEPROM address bit 5~bit 0 • BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — x x x x x x x "x" unknown Bit 7 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 6~0 Data EEPROM address Data EEPROM address bit 6~bit 0 EEC Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — WREN WR RDEN RD R/W — — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — — — — 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~4 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 3 WREN: data EEPROM write enable 0: disable 1: enable This is the Data EEPROM Write Enable Bit which must be set high before Data EEPROM write operations are carried out. Clearing this bit to zero will inhibit Data EEPROM write operations. Bit 2 WR: EEPROM write control 0: Write cycle has finished 1: Activate a write cycle This is the Data EEPROM Write Control Bit and when set high by the application program will activate a write cycle. This bit will be automatically reset to zero by the hardware after the write cycle has finished. Setting this bit high will have no effect if the WREN has not first been set high. Bit 1 RDEN: Data EEPROM read enable 0: disable 1: enable This is the Data EEPROM Read Enable Bit which must be set high before Data EEPROM read operations are carried out. Clearing this bit to zero will inhibit Data EEPROM read operations. 39 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Bit 0 RD: EEPROM read control 0: read cycle has finished 1: activate a read cycle This is the Data EEPROM Read Control Bit and when set high by the application program will activate a read cycle. This bit will be automatically reset to zero by the hardware after the read cycle has finished. Setting this bit high will have no effect if the RDEN has not first been set high. Note: The WREN, WR, RDEN and RD can not be set to "1" at the same time in one instruction. The WR and RD can not be set to "1" at the same time. EED Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR x x x x x x x x "x" unknown Bit 7~0 Data EEPROM data Data EEPROM data bit 7~bit 0 Reading Data from the EEPROM To read data from the EEPROM, the read enable bit, RDEN, in the EEC register must first be set high to enable the read function. The EEPROM address of the data to be read must then be placed in the EEA register. If the RD bit in the EEC register is now set high, a read cycle will be initiated. Setting the RD bit high will not initiate a read operation if the RDEN bit has not been set. When the read cycle terminates, the RD bit will be automatically cleared to zero, after which the data can be read from the EED register. The data will remain in the EED register until another read or write operation is executed. The application program can poll the RD bit to determine when the data is valid for reading. Writing Data to the EEPROM The EEPROM address of the data to be written must first be placed in the EEA register and the data placed in the EED register. To write data to the EEPROM, the write enable bit, WREN, in the EEC register must first be set high to enable the write function. After this, the WR bit in the EEC register must be immediately set high to initiate a write cycle. These two instructions must be executed consecutively. The global interrupt bit EMI should also first be cleared before implementing any write operations, and then set again after the write cycle has started. Note that setting the WR bit high will not initiate a write cycle if the WREN bit has not been set. As the EEPROM write cycle is controlled using an internal timer whose operation is asynchronous to microcontroller system clock, a certain time will elapse before the data will have been written into the EEPROM. Detecting when the write cycle has finished can be implemented either by polling the WR bit in the EEC register or by using the EEPROM interrupt. When the write cycle terminates, the WR bit will be automatically cleared to zero by the microcontroller, informing the user that the data has been written to the EEPROM. The application program can therefore poll the WR bit to determine when the write cycle has ended. Write Protection Protection against inadvertent write operation is provided in several ways. After the device is poweredon the Write Enable bit in the control register will be cleared preventing any write operations. Also at power-on the Bank Pointer, BP, will be reset to zero, which means that Data Memory Bank 0 will be selected. As the EEPROM control register is located in Bank 1, this adds a further measure of protection against spurious write operations. During normal program operation, ensuring that the Write Enable bit in the control register is cleared will safeguard against incorrect write operations. Rev. 1.20 40 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver EEPROM Interrupt The EEPROM write interrupt is generated when an EEPROM write cycle has ended. The EEPROM interrupt must first be enabled by setting the DEE bit in the relevant interrupt register. However as the EEPROM is contained within a Multi-function Interrupt, the associated multi-function interrupt enable bit must also be set. When an EEPROM write cycle ends, the DEF request flag and its associated multi-function interrupt request flag will both be set. If the global, EEPROM and Multifunction interrupts are enabled and the stack is not full, a jump to the associated Multi-function Interrupt vector will take place. When the interrupt is serviced only the Multi-function interrupt flag will be automatically reset, the EEPROM interrupt flag must be manually reset by the application program. More details can be obtained in the Interrupt section. Programming Considerations Care must be taken that data is not inadvertently written to the EEPROM. Protection can be enhanced by ensuring that the Write Enable bit is normally cleared to zero when not writing. Also the Bank Pointer could be normally cleared to zero as this would inhibit access to Bank 1 where the EEPROM control register exist. Although certainly not necessary, consideration might be given in the application program to the checking of the validity of new write data by a simple read back process. When writing data the WR bit must be set high immediately after the WREN bit has been set high, to ensure the write cycle executes correctly. The global interrupt bit EMI should also be cleared before a write cycle is executed and then re-enabled after the write cycle starts. Programming Examples Reading Data from the EEPROM – Polling Method MOV A, EEPROM_ADRES ; user defined address MOV EEA, A MOV A, 040H ; setup memory pointer MP1 MOV MP1, A ; MP1 points to EEC register MOV A, 01H ; setup Bank Pointer MOV BP, A SET IAR1.1 ; set RDEN bit, enable read operations SET IAR1.0 ; start Read Cycle - set RD bit BACK: SZ IAR1.0 ; check for read cycle end JMP BACK CLR IAR1 ; disable EEPROM read/write CLR BP MOV A, EED ; move read data to register MOV READ_DATA, A Writing Data to the EEPROM – Polling Method CLR EMI MOV A, EEPROM_ADRES ; user defined address MOV EEA, A MOV A, EEPROM_DATA ; user defined data MOV EED, A MOV A, 040H ; setup memory pointer MP1 MOV MP1, A ; MP1 points to EEC register MOV A, 01H ; setup Bank Pointer MOV BP, A SET IAR1.3 ; set WREN bit, enable write operations SET IAR1.2 ; Start Write Cycle-set WR bit-executed immediately after set WREN bit SET EMI BACK: SZ IAR1.2 ; check for write cycle end JMP BACK CLR IAR1 ; disable EEPROM read/write CLR BP Rev. 1.20 41 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Oscillator Various oscillator options offer the user a wide range of functions according to their various application requirements. The flexible features of the oscillator functions ensure that the best optimisation can be achieved in terms of speed and power saving. Oscillator selections and operation are selected through a combination of configuration options and registers. Oscillator Overview In addition to being the source of the main system clock the slow speed oscillators also provide clock sources for the Watchdog Timer and Time Base. External oscillators requiring some external components as well as fully integrated internal oscillators, requiring no external components, are provided to form a wide range of both fast and slow system oscillators. All oscillator options are selected through registers. The higher frequency oscillators provide higher performance but carry with it the disadvantage of higher power requirements, while the opposite is of course true for the lower frequency oscillators. With the capability of dynamically switching between fast and slow system clock, the device has the flexibility to optimize the performance/power ratio, a feature especially important in power sensitive portable applications. Device All BS85C20-5 Type Name Freq. Pins Internal High Speed HIRC 8,12 or 16MHz — Internal Low Speed LIRC 32kHz — External Low Speed LXT 32.768kHz OSC1/OSC2 Oscillator Types System Clock Configurations There are two methods of generating the system clock, a high speed internal clock source and low speed internal clock source. The high speed oscillator is an internal 8MHz, 12MHz or 16MHz RC oscillator while the low speed oscillator is an internal 32kHz RC oscillator. Both oscillators are fully integrated and do not require external components. Selecting whether the low or high speed oscillator is used as the system oscillator is implemented using the HLCLK bit and CKS2 ~ CKS0 bits in the SMOD register allowing the system clock to be dynamically selected. Internal High Speed RC Oscillator – HIRC The internal High Speed RC oscillator is a fully integrated system oscillator requiring no external components. The internal RC oscillator has a power on default frequency of 8 MHz but can be selected to be either 8MHz, 12MHz or 16MHz using the HIRCS1 and HIRCS0 bits in the CTRL register. Device trimming during the manufacturing process and the inclusion of internal frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that the influence of the power supply voltage, temperature and process variations on the oscillation frequency are minimised. Rev. 1.20 42 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver CTRL Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — HIRCS1 HIRCS0 — — D1 D0 R/W — — R/W R/W — — R/W R/W POR — — 0 0 — — 0 0 "x" unknown Bit 7~6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5~4 HIRCS1, HIRCS0: High frequency clock select 00: 8MHz 01: 16MHz 10: 12MHz 11: 8MHz Bit 3~2 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 D1, D0: These bits must be set to the binary value "00" External 32.768kHz Crystal Oscillator – LXT (BS85C20-5 only) For the BS85C20-5, there is an additional external 32.768kHz crystal oscillator that is used as a clock source for Time Base. This clock source has a fixed frequency of 32.768kHz and requires a 32.768kHz crystal to be connected between pins OSC1 and OSC2. The external resistor and capacitor components connected to the 32.768kHz crystal are necessary to provide oscillation. For applications where precise frequencies are essential, these components may be required to provide frequency compensation due to different crystal manufacturing tolerances. During power-up there is a time delay associated with the LXT oscillator waiting for it to start-up and stabilise. The exact values of C1 and C2 should be selected in consultation with the crystal or resonator manufacturer’s specification. The external parallel feedback resistor, Rp, is normally required. External LXT Oscillator LXT Oscillator C1 and C2 Values Crystal Frequency C1 C2 32.768kHz 10pF 10pF Note:1. C1 and C2 values are for guidance only. 2. RP= 5M~10MΩ is recommended. 32.768kHz Crystal Recommended Capacitor Values Rev. 1.20 43 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver LXT Oscillator Low Power Function (BS85C20-5 only) The LXT oscillator can function in one of two modes, the Quick Start Mode and the Low Power Mode. The mode selection is executed using the LXTLP bit in the TBC register. LXTLP Bit LXT Mode 0 Quick Start 1 Low-power After power on the LXTLP bit, it will be automatically cleared to zero ensuring that the LXT oscillator is in the Quick Start operating mode. In the Quick Start Mode the LXT oscillator will power up and stabilise quickly. However, after the LXT oscillator has fully powered up it can be placed into the Low-power mode by setting the LXTLP bit high. The oscillator will continue to run but with reduced current consumption, as the higher current consumption is only required during the LXT oscillator start-up. In power sensitive applications, such as battery applications, where power consumption must be kept to a minimum, it is therefore recommended that the application program sets the LXTLP bit high about 2 seconds after power-on. It should be noted that, no matter what condition the LXTLP bit is set to, the LXT oscillator will be always function normally, the only difference is that it will take more time to start up if it is in the Low-power mode. Internal Low Speed RC Oscillator – LIRC The Internal 32kHz System Oscillator is the low frequency oscillator. It is a fully integrated RC oscillator with a typical frequency of 32kHz at 5V, requiring no external components for its implementation. Device trimming during the manufacturing process and the inclusion of internal frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that the influence of the power supply voltage, temperature and process variations on the oscillation frequency are minimised. After power on this LIRC oscillator will be permanently enabled; there is no provision to disable the oscillator using register bits. Operating Modes and System Clocks Present day applications require that their microcontrollers have high performance but often still demand that they consume as little power as possible, conflicting requirements that are especially true in battery powered portable applications. The fast clocks required for high performance will by their nature increase current consumption and of course vice-versa, lower speed clocks reduce current consumption. As Holtek has provided these devices with both high and low speed clock sources and the means to switch between them dynamically, the user can optimise the operation of their microcontroller to achieve the best performance/power ratio. System Clocks The main system clock, can come from either a high frequency, fH, or low frequency, fL, source, and is selected using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register. Both the high and low speed system clocks are sourced from internal RC oscillators. For BS85C20-5, the Time base 0/1 is sourced from LXT or fSYS/4. Rev. 1.20 44 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver System Clock Configurations – BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3 System Clock Configurations – BS85C20-5 Rev. 1.20 45 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Control Register A single register, SMOD, is used for overall control of the internal clocks within the device. SMOD Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 D4 LTO HTO IDLEN HLCLK R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bit 7~5 CKS2~CKS0: The system clock selection when HLCLK is "0" 000: fL (fLIRC) 001: fL (fLIRC) 010: fH/64 011: fH/32 100: fH/16 101: fH/8 110: fH/4 111: fH/2 These three bits are used to select which clock is used as the system clock source. In addition to the system clock source, which is LIRC, a divided version of the high speed system oscillator can also be chosen as the system clock source. Bit 4 Undefined bit These bits can be read or written by user software program. Bit 3 LTO: Low speed system oscillator ready flag 0: not ready 1: ready This is the low speed system oscillator ready flag which indicates when the low speed system oscillator is stable after power on reset. Bit 2 HTO: High speed system oscillator ready flag 0: not ready 1: ready This is the high speed system oscillator ready flag which indicates when the high speed system oscillator is stable. This flag is cleared to "0" by hardware when the device is powered on and then changes to a high level after the high speed system oscillator is stable. Therefore this flag will always be read as "1" by the application program after device power-on. The flag will be low when in the SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode but after a wake-up has occurred, the flag will change to a high level after 15~16 clock cycles. Bit 1 IDLEN: IDLE Mode control 0: disable 1: enable This is the IDLE Mode Control bit and determines what happens when the HALT instruction is executed. If this bit is high, when a HALT instruction is executed the device will enter the IDLE Mode. In the IDLE1 Mode the CPU will stop running but the system clock will continue to keep the peripheral functions operational, if FSYSON bit is high. If FSYSON bit is low, the CPU and the system clock will all stop in IDLE0 mode. If the bit is low the device will enter the SLEEP Mode when a HALT instruction is executed. Bit 0 HLCLK: system clock selection 0: fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL 1: fH This bit is used to select if the fH clock or the fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL clock is used as the system clock. When the bit is high the fH clock will be selected and if low the fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL clock will be selected. When system clock switches from the fH clock to the fL clock and the fH clock will be automatically switched off to conserve power. 46 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver System Operation Modes There are five different modes of operation for the microcontroller, each one with its own special characteristics and which can be chosen according to the specific performance and power requirements of the application. There are two modes allowing normal operation of the microcontroller, the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode. The remaining three modes, the SLEEP, IDLE0 and IDLE1 Mode are used when the microcontroller CPU is switched off to conserve power. Description Operation Mode CPU fSYS fLIRC fTBC NORMAL Mode On fH~ fH/64 On On SLOW Mode On fL On On IDLE0 Mode Off Off On On IDLE1 Mode Off On On On SLEEP Mode Off Off On Off NORMAL Mode As the name suggests this is one of the main operating modes where the microcontroller has all of its functions operational and where the system clock is provided by the high speed oscillator. The high speed oscillator will however first be divided by a ratio ranging from 1 to 64, the actual ratio being selected by the CKS2~CKS0 and HLCLK bits in the SMOD register. Although a high speed oscillator is used, running the microcontroller at a divided clock ratio reduces the operating current. SLOW Mode This is also a mode where the microcontroller operates normally although now with the slow speed clock source. Running the microcontroller in this mode allows it to run with much lower operating currents. In the SLOW Mode, the high speed clock is off. SLEEP Mode The SLEEP Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the SMOD register is low. In the SLEEP mode the CPU will be stopped however as the fLIRC oscillator continues to run the Watchdog Timer will continue to operate. IDLE0 Mode The IDLE0 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the SMOD register is high and the FSYSON bit in the WDTC register is low. In the IDLE0 Mode the system oscillator the system oscillator will be stopped and will therefore be inhibited from driving the CPU. IDLE1 Mode The IDLE1 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the SMOD register is high and the FSYSON bit in the WDTC register is high. In the IDLE1 Mode the system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU but may continue to provide a clock source to keep some peripheral functions operational. In the IDLE1 Mode, the system oscillator will continue to run, and this system oscillator may be the high speed or low speed system oscillator. Rev. 1.20 47 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Operating Mode Switching The device can switch between operating modes dynamically allowing the user to select the best performance/power ratio for the present task in hand. In this way microcontroller operations that do not require high performance can be executed using slower clocks thus requiring less operating current and prolonging battery life in portable applications. In simple terms, Mode Switching between the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode is executed using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register while Mode Switching from the NORMAL/SLOW Modes to the SLEEP/IDLE Modes is executed via the HALT instruction. When a HALT instruction is executed, whether the device enters the IDLE Mode or the SLEEP Mode is determined by the condition of the IDLEN bit in the SMOD register and FSYSON in the WDTC register. When the HLCLK bit switches to a low level, which implies that clock source is switched from the high speed clock source, fHIRC, to the clock source, fHIRC/2~fHIRC/64 or fLIRC. If the clock is from fHIRC, the high speed clock source will stop running to conserve power. When this happens it must be noted that the fHIRC/16 and fHIRC/64 internal clock sources will also stop running. The accompanying flowchart shows what happens when the device moves between the various operating modes. Rev. 1.20 48 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver NORMAL Mode to SLOW Mode Switching When running in the NORMAL Mode, which uses the high speed system oscillator, and therefore consumes more power, the system clock can switch to run in the SLOW Mode by set the HLCLK bit to "0" and set the CKS2~CKS0 bits to "000" or "001" in the SMOD register. This will then use the low speed system oscillator which will consume less power. Users may decide to do this for certain operations which do not require high performance and can subsequently reduce power consumption. The SLOW Mode clock is sourced from the LIRC oscillator. SLOW Mode to NORMAL Mode Switching In SLOW Mode the system uses the LIRC low speed system oscillator. To switch back to the NORMAL Mode, where the high speed system oscillator is used, the HLCLK bit should be set to "1" or HLCLK bit is "0", but CKS2~CKS0 is set to "010", "011", "100", "101", "110" or "111". As a certain amount of time will be required for the high frequency clock to stabilise, the status of the HTO bit is checked. The amount of time required for high speed system oscillator stabilization depends upon which high speed system oscillator type is used. Entering the SLEEP Mode There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP Mode and that is to execute the "HALT" instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to "0". When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above, the following will occur: • The system clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the "HALT" instruction, but the fLIRC clock will be on • The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition • The WDT will be cleared and resume counting • The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions • In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO, will be cleared Rev. 1.20 49 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Entering the IDLE0 Mode There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE0 Mode and that is to execute the "HALT" instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to "1" and the FSYSON bit in WDTC register equal to "0". When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above, the following will occur: • The system clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the "HALT" instruction, but the Time Base clock and fLIRC clock will be on • The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition • The WDT will be cleared and resume counting • The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions • In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO, will be cleared Entering the IDLE1 Mode There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE1 Mode and that is to execute the "HALT" instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to "1" and the FSYSON bit in WDTC register equal to "1". When this instruction is executed under the with conditions described above, the following will occur: • The system clock and fLIRC clock will be on and the application program will stop at the "HALT" instruction • The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition • The WDT will be cleared and resume counting • The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions • In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO, will be cleared Standby Current Considerations As the main reason for entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode is to keep the current consumption of the device to as low a value as possible, perhaps only in the order of several micro-amps except in the IDLE1 Mode, there are other considerations which must also be taken into account by the circuit designer if the power consumption is to be minimised. Special attention must be made to the I/O pins on the device. All high-impedance input pins must be connected to either a fixed high or low level as any floating input pins could create internal oscillations and result in increased current consumption. This also applies to devices which have different package types, as there may be unbonbed pins. These must either be setup as outputs or if setup as inputs must have pull-high resistors connected. Care must also be taken with the loads, which are connected to I/O pins, which are setup as outputs. These should be placed in a condition in which minimum current is drawn or connected only to external circuits that do not draw current, such as other CMOS inputs. In the IDLE1 Mode the system oscillator is on, if the system oscillator is from the high speed system oscillator, the additional standby current will also be perhaps in the order of several hundred microamps. Rev. 1.20 50 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Wake-up After the system enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, it can be woken up from one of various sources listed as follows: • An external reset • An external falling edge on Port A • A system interrupt • A WDT overflow If the system is woken up by an external reset, the device will experience a full system reset, however, if the device is woken up by a WDT overflow, a Watchdog Timer reset will be initiated. Although both of these wake-up methods will initiate a reset operation, the actual source of the wake-up can be determined by examining the TO and PDF flags. The PDF flag is cleared by a system power-up or executing the clear Watchdog Timer instructions and is set when executing the "HALT" instruction. The TO flag is set if a WDT time-out occurs, and causes a wake-up that only resets the Program Counter and Stack Pointer, the other flags remain in their original status. Each pin on Port A can be setup using the PAWU register to permit a negative transition on the pin to wake-up the system. When a Port A pin wake-up occurs, the program will resume execution at the instruction following the "HALT" instruction. If the system is woken up by an interrupt, then two possible situations may occur. The first is where the related interrupt is disabled or the interrupt is enabled but the stack is full, in which case the program will resume execution at the instruction following the "HALT" instruction. In this situation, the interrupt which woke-up the device will not be immediately serviced, but will rather be serviced later when the related interrupt is finally enabled or when a stack level becomes free. The other situation is where the related interrupt is enabled and the stack is not full, in which case the regular interrupt response takes place. If an interrupt request flag is set high before entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, the wake-up function of the related interrupt will be disabled. System Oscillator Wake-up Time (SLEEP Mode) Wake-up Time (IDLE0 Mode) Wake-up Time (IDLE1 Mode) HIRC 15~16 HIRC cycles 1~2 HIRC cycles LIRC 1~2 LIRC cycles 1~2 LIRC cycles Wake-Up Times Programming Considerations The high speed and low speed oscillators both use the same SST counter. For example, if the system is woken up from the SLEEP Mode the HIRC oscillator needs to start-up from an off state. • If the device is woken up from the SLEEP Mode to the NORMAL Mode, the high speed system oscillator needs an SST period. The device will execute the first instruction after HTO is high. Rev. 1.20 51 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Watchdog Timer The Watchdog Timer is provided to prevent program malfunctions or sequences from jumping to unknown locations, due to certain uncontrollable external events such as electrical noise. Watchdog Timer Clock Source The Watchdog Timer clock source is provided by the internal low speed oscillator, fLIRC. The Watchdog Timer source clock is then subdivided by a ratio of 28 to 215 to give longer timeouts, the actual value being chosen using the WS2~WS0 bits in the WDTC register. The LIRC internal oscillator has an approximate period of 32kHz at a supply voltage of 5V. However, it should be noted that this specified internal clock period can vary with VDD, temperature and process variations. Watchdog Timer Control Register A single register, WDTC, controls the required timeout period. WDTC Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FSYSON WS2 WS1 WS0 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 Bit 7 FSYSON: fSYS control in IDLE Mode 0: disable 1: enable Bit 6~4 WS2, WS1, WS0 : WDT time-out period selection 000: 256/fLIRC 001: 512/fLIRC 010: 1024/fLIRC 011: 2048/fLIRC 100: 4096/fLIRC 101: 8192/fLIRC 110: 16384/fLIRC 111: 32768/fLIRC These three bits determine the division ratio of the Watchdog Timer source clock, which in turn determines the timeout period. Bit 3~0 Undefined bit These bits can be read or written by user software program. 52 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Watchdog Timer Operation In these devices the Watchdog Timer supplied by the fLIRC oscillator and is therefore always on. The Watchdog Timer operates by providing a device reset when its timer overflows. This means that in the application program and during normal operation the user has to strategically clear the Watchdog Timer before it overflows to prevent the Watchdog Timer from executing a reset. This is done using the clear watchdog instructions. If the program malfunctions for whatever reason, jumps to an unkown location, or enters an endless loop, these clear instructions will not be executed in the correct manner, in which case the Watchdog Timer will overflow and reset the device. Under normal program operation, a Watchdog Timer time-out will initialise a device reset and set the status bit TO. However, if the system is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, when a Watchdog Timer time-out occurs, the TO bit in the status register will be set and only the Program Counter and Stack Pointer will be reset. Three methods can be adopted to clear the contents of the Watchdog Timer. The first is an external hardware reset, the second is using the Watchdog Timer software clear instructions and the third is via a HALT instruction. The Watchdog Timer is cleared using a single CLR WDT instruction. The maximum time out period is when the 215 division ratio is selected. As an example, with the LIRC oscillator as its source clock, this will give a maximum watchdog period of around 1 second for the 215 division ratio, and a minimum timeout of 7.8ms for the 28 division ration. Watchdog Timer Rev. 1.20 53 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Reset and Initialisation A reset function is a fundamental part of any microcontroller ensuring that the device can be set to some predetermined condition irrespective of outside parameters. The most important reset condition is after power is first applied to the microcontroller. In this case, internal circuitry will ensure that the microcontroller, after a short delay, will be in a well defined state and ready to execute the first program instruction. After this power-on reset, certain important internal registers will be set to defined states before the program commences. One of these registers is the Program Counter, which will be reset to zero forcing the microcontroller to begin program execution from the lowest Program Memory address. Another type of reset is when the Watchdog Timer overflows and resets the microcontroller. All types of reset operations result in different register conditions being setup. Another reset exists in the form of a Low Voltage Reset, LVR, where a full reset, is implemented in situations where the power supply voltage falls below a certain threshold. Reset Functions There are several ways in which a microcontroller reset can occur, through events occurring both internally and externally: Power-on Reset The most fundamental and unavoidable reset is the one that occurs after power is first applied to the microcontroller. As well as ensuring that the Program Memory begins execution from the first memory address, a power-on reset also ensures that certain other registers are preset to known conditions. All the I/O port and port control registers will power up in a high condition ensuring that all pins will be first set to inputs. Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=100ms Power-On Reset Timing Chart Low Voltage Reset – LVR If the supply voltage of the device drops to within a range of 0.9V~VLVR such as might occur when changing the battery, the LVR will automatically reset the device internally. The LVR includes the following specifications: For a valid LVR signal, a low voltage, i.e., a voltage in the range between 0.9V~VLVR must exist for greater than the value tLVR specified in the A.C. characteristics. If the low voltage state does not exceed tLVR, the LVR will ignore it and will not perform a reset function. One of a range of specified voltage values for VLVR can be selected using configuration options. The LVR function is permanently on in these devices. Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=100ms Low Voltage Reset Timing Chart Rev. 1.20 54 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Watchdog Time-out Reset during Normal Operation The Watchdog time-out Reset during normal operation is the same as a hardware power-on reset except that the Watchdog time-out flag TO will be set to "1". Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=100ms WDT Time-out Reset during Normal Operation Timing Chart Watchdog Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode The Watchdog time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode is a little different from other kinds of reset. Most of the conditions remain unchanged except that the Program Counter and the Stack Pointer will be cleared to "0" and the TO flag will be set to "1". Refer to the A.C. Characteristics for tSST details. Note: The tSST is 15~16 clock cycles if the system clock source is provided by HIRC. The tSST is 1~2 clock for LIRC. WDT Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Timing Chart Reset Initial Conditions The different types of reset described affect the reset flags in different ways. These flags, known as PDF and TO are located in the status register and are controlled by various microcontroller operations, such as the SLEEP or IDLE Mode function or Watchdog Timer. The reset flags are shown in the table: TO PDF RESET Conditions 0 0 Power-on reset u u LVR reset during NORMAL or SLOW Mode operation 1 u WDT time-out reset during NORMAL or SLOW Mode operation 1 1 WDT time-out reset during IDLE or SLEEP Mode operation Note: "u" stands for unchanged The following table indicates the way in which the various components of the microcontroller are affected after a power-on reset occurs. Item Rev. 1.20 Condition After RESET Program Counter Reset to zero Interrupts All interrupts will be disabled WDT Clear after reset, WDT begins counting Timer Modules Timer Counter will be turned off Input/Output Ports I/O ports will be setup as inputs Stack Pointer Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack 55 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver The different kinds of resets all affect the internal registers of the microcontroller in different ways. To ensure reliable continuation of normal program execution after a reset occurs, it is important to know what condition the microcontroller is in after a particular reset occurs. The following table describes how each type of reset affects each of the microcontroller internal registers. Note that where more than one package type exists the table will reflect the situation for the larger package type. BS85B12-3 /BS85B20-5 BS85B20-3 Power-on Reset MP0 • • xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu MP1 • • xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu BP • ---- ---0 ---- ---0 ---- ---0 ---- ---u ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu Register • BP LVR Reset Time-out (Normal Operation) Time-out (IDLE or SLEEP) ACC • • xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PCL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 TBLP • • xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TBLH • • -xxx xxxx -uuu uuuu -uuu uuuu -uuu uuuu TBHP • ---- -xxx ---- -uuu ---- -uuu ---- -uuu • ---- xxxx ---- uuuu ---- uuuu ---- uuuu • • --00 xxxx --uu uuuu --1u uuuu --11 uuuu SMOD • • 0000 0011 0000 0011 0000 0011 uuuu uuuu LVDC • • - -0 0 - 0 0 0 - -0 0 - 0 0 0 - -0 0 - 0 0 0 --uu -uuu INTEG • • ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu WDTC • • 0111 1010 0111 1010 0111 1010 uuuu uuuu TBC • • 0011 0111 0011 0111 0011 0111 uuuu uuuu • • -000 0000 -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu INTC1 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu INTC2 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu MFI0 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu MFI1 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu MFI2 • • -000 -000 -000 -000 -000 -000 -uuu -uuu MFI3 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PAWU • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PAPU • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PA • • 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PAC • • PBPU • TBHP INTC3 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu --00 0000 --uu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu --11 1111 --11 1111 --11 1111 --uu uuuu 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu --11 1111 --11 1111 --11 1111 --uu uuuu • 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu • • PB PBC 1111 1111 --00 0000 • PBPU PB 1111 1111 --00 0000 • PBC PCPU • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PC • • 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PCC • • 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PDPU • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PD • 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PDC • 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu Rev. 1.20 56 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver /BS85B20-5 BS85B20-3 PEPU • --00 0000 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu PE • --11 1111 --11 1111 --11 1111 --uu uuuu PEC • --11 1111 --11 1111 --11 1111 --uu uuuu BS85B12-3 Power-on Reset Register LVR Reset Time-out (Normal Operation) Time-out (IDLE or SLEEP) SLCDC0 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SLCDC1 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SLCDC2 • --00 0000 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu SLCDC2 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SLCDC3 • 0-00 0000 0-00 0000 0-00 0000 u-uu uuuu --00 0000 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu SLEDC0 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SLEDC2 • --00 0000 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu MFI4 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu MFI5 • --00 --00 --00 --00 --00 --00 --uu --uu SLEDC0 SLEDC1 • I2CTOC • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SIMC0 • • 1110 000- 1110 000- 1110 000- uuuu uuu- SIMC1 • • 1000 0001 1000 0001 1000 0001 uuuu uuuu SIMD • • xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu SIMA/ SIMC2 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM0C0 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM0C1 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM0DL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM0DH • • ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu TM0AL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM0AH • • ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu EEA • 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 uu uuuu EEA EED • TMPC0 • TMPC1 PRM0 000 0000 000 0000 uuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu • 1001 01 1001 01 1001 01 uuuu uu • ---- --01 ---- --01 ---- --01 ---- --uu -0-0 -0-0 -0-0 -0-0 -0-0 -0-0 -u-u -u-u 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 -0-0 0000 -0-0 0000 -0-0 uuuu -u-u 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 --00 0000 --00 0000 --00 uuuu --uu • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu • • • PRM1 PRM2 000 0000 0000 0000 • PRM0 PRM1 • • • PRM2 TM1C0 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM1C1 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM1C2 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM1DL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM1DH • • ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu TM1AL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM1AH • • ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu TM1BL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu Rev. 1.20 57 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver BS85B12-3 /BS85B20-5 BS85B20-3 • • ---- - -0 0 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu TM2C0 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM2C1 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM2DL • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM2DH • ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu TM2AL • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TM2AH • ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu Register TM1BH Power-on Reset LVR Reset Time-out (Normal Operation) Time-out (IDLE or SLEEP) CTRL • • --00 --00 --00 --00 --00 --00 --uu --uu TKM016DH • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM016DL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM0C0 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM0C1 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM0C2 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM0C3 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM116DH • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM116DL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM1C0 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM1C1 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM1C2 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM1C3 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM216DH • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM216DL • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM2C0 TKM2C1 • • 0000 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu ---- TKM2C2 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM2C3 • • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM316DH • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM316DL • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM3C0 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM3C1 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM3C2 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM3C3 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM416DH • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM416DL • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM4C0 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM4C1 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM4C2 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TKM4C3 • 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu • ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu EEC • Note: "u" stands for unchanged "x" stands for unknown "-" stands for unimplemented Rev. 1.20 58 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Input/Output Ports Holtek microcontrollers offer considerable flexibility on their I/O ports. With the input or output designation of every pin fully under user program control, pull-high selections for all ports and wake-up selections on certain pins, the user is provided with an I/O structure to meet the needs of a wide range of application possibilities. The device provides bidirectional input/output lines labeled with port names PA~PE. These I/O ports are mapped to the RAM Data Memory with specific addresses as shown in the Special Purpose Data Memory table. All of these I/O ports can be used for input and output operations. For input operation, these ports are non-latching, which means the inputs must be ready at the T2 rising edge of instruction "MOV A,[m]", where m denotes the port address. For output operation, all the data is latched and remains unchanged until the output latch is rewritten. I/O Register List BS85B12-3 Bit Register Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PAWU D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PAPU D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PA D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PAC D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PBPU — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PB — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PBC — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PCPU D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PC D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PCC D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Rev. 1.20 Bit Register Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PAWU D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PAPU D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PA D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PAC D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PBPU D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PB D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PBC D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PCPU D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PC D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PCC D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PDPU D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PD D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PDC D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PEPU — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PE — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PEC — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 59 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pull-high Resistors Many product applications require pull-high resistors for their switch inputs usually requiring the use of an external resistor. To eliminate the need for these external resistors, all I/O pins, when configured as an input have the capability of being connected to an internal pull-high resistor. These pull-high resistors are selected using the register PAPU~PEPU, and are implemented using weak PMOS transistors. BS85B12-3: PAPU, PCPU Registers BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5: PAPU, PBPU, PCPU, PDPU Registers Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 PxPU: Port bit 7~bit 0 Pull-High control 0: disable 1: enable BS85B12-3: PBPU Registers BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5: PEPU Registers Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — — 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~4 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 3~0 PxPU: Port bit 5~bit 0 Pull-High control 0: disable 1: enable Port A Wake-up The HALT instruction forces the microcontroller into the SLEEP or IDLE Mode which preserves power, a feature that is important for battery and other low-power applications. Various methods exist to wake-up the microcontroller, one of which is to change the logic condition on one of the Port A pins from high to low. This function is especially suitable for applications that can be woken up via external switches. Each pin on Port A can be selected individually to have this wake-up feature using the PAWU register. PAWU Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~5 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 4~0 PAWU: Port A bit 7~bit 0 wake-up control 0: disable 1: enable 60 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver I/O Port Control Register The I/O port has its own control register known as PAC~PEC, to control the input/output configuration. With this control register, each CMOS output or input can be reconfigured dynamically under software control. Each pin of the I/O port is directly mapped to a bit in its associated port control register. For the I/O pin to function as an input, the corresponding bit of the control register must be written as a "1". This will then allow the logic state of the input pin to be directly read by instructions. When the corresponding bit of the control register is written as a "0", the I/O pin will be setup as a CMOS output. If the pin is currently setup as an output, instructions can still be used to read the output register. However, it should be noted that the program will in fact only read the status of the output data latch and not the actual logic status of the output pin. BS85B12-3: PAC, PCC Registers BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5: PAC, PBC, PCC, PDC Registers Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 0 Bit 7~0 PxC: I/O Port bit 7 ~ bit 0 input/output control 0: output 1: input BS85B12-3: PBC Registers BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5: PEC Registers Bit 7 6 5 4 Name — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — — 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 7~4 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 3~0 PxC: Port bit 5~bit 0 input/output control 0: output 1: input Pin Re-mapping Functions The flexibility of the microcontroller range is greatly enhanced by the use of pins that have more than one function. Limited numbers of pins can force serious design constraints on designers but by supplying pins with multi-functions, many of these difficulties can be overcome. The way in which the pin function of each pin is selected is different for each function and a priority order is established where more than one pin function is selected simultaneously. Additionally there are a series of PRM0, PRM1 and PRM2 registers to establish certain pin functions. Pin-remapping Registers The limited number of supplied pins in a package can impose restrictions on the amount of functions a certain device can contain. However by allowing the same pins to share several different functions and providing a means of function selection, a wide range of different functions can be incorporated into even relatively small package sizes. The device includes PRM0, PRM1, PRM2 registers which can select the functions of certain pins. Rev. 1.20 61 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Pin-remapping Register List • BS85B12-3 Bit Register Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PRM0 — SCSPS0 — SDIPS0 — SCKPS0 — SDOPS0 PRM1 INT1PS INT0PS TCK1PS TCK0PS — PINTS0 — PCKPS0 TP1B2PS TP1B1PS TP1B0PS TP1APS — — TP01PS TP00PS 4 3 2 1 0 PRM2 • BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Bit Register Name 7 6 PRM0 SCSPS1 SCSPS0 SDIPS1 SDIPS0 SCKPS1 SCKPS0 SDOPS1 SDOPS0 PRM1 INT1PS INT0PS TCK1PS TCK0PS PINTS1 PINTS0 PCKPS1 PCKPS0 TP1B2PS TP1B1PS TP1B0PS TP1APS TP21PS TP20PS TP01PS TP00PS PRM2 SLCDC3 TCK2PS — 5 SEG21EN SEG20EN SEG19EN SEG18EN SEG17EN SEG16EN PRM0 Register – BS85B12-3 Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — SCSPS0 — SDIPS0 — SCKPS0 — SDOPS0 R/W — R/W — R/W — R/W — R/W POR — 0 — 0 — 0 — 0 Bit 7 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 6 SCSPS0: SCS pin remapping control 0: SCS on PA3 1: SCS on PC3 Bit 5 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 4 SDIPS0: SDI/SDA pin remapping control 0: SDI/SDA on PA0 1: SDI/SDA on PC2 Bit 3 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 2 SCKPS0: SCK/SCL pin remapping control 0: SCK/SCL on PA2 1: SCK/SCL on PC1 Bit 1 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 0 SDOPS0: SDO pin remapping control 0: SDO on PA7 1: SDO on PC0 62 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver PRM0 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Name SCSPS1 SCSPS0 SDIPS1 SDIPS0 SCKPS1 SCKPS0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 SCSPS1~SCSPS0: SCS pin remapping control 00: SCS on PA3 01: SCS on PC3 10: SCS on PE2 11: undefined Bit 5~4 SDIPS1~SDIPS0: SDI/SDA pin remapping control 00: SDI/SDA on PA0 01: SDI/SDA on PC2 10: SDI/SDA on PE4 11: undefined Bit 3~2 SCKPS1~SCKPS0: SCK/SCL pin remapping control 00: SCK/SCL on PA2 01: SCK/SCL on PC1 10: SCK/SCL on PE3 11: undefined Bit 1~0 SDOPS1~SDOPS0: SDO pin remapping control 00: SDO on PA7 01: SDO on PC0 10: SDO on PE5 11: undefined 1 0 SDOPS1 SDOPS0 PRM1 Register – BS85B12-3 Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name INT1PS INT0PS TCK1PS TCK0PS — PINTS0 — PCKPS0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — R/W — R/W POR 0 0 0 0 — 0 — 0 Bit 7 INT1PS: INT1 pin remapping control 0: INT1 on PA1 1: INT1 on PC5 Bit 6 INT0PS: INT0 pin remapping control 0: INT0 on PA4 1: INT0 on PC4 Bit 5 TCK1PS: TCK1 pin remapping control 0: TCK1 on PA1 1: TCK1 on PC5 Bit 4 TCK0PS: TCK0 pin remapping control 0: TCK0 on PA4 1: TCK0 on PC4 Bit 3 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 2 PINTS0: PINT pin remapping control 0: PINT on PB5 1: PINT on PC7 Bit 1 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 0 PCKPS0: PCK pin remapping control 0: PCK on PB4 1: PCK on PC6 63 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver PRM1 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name INT1PS INT0PS TCK1PS TCK0PS PINTS1 PINTS0 PCKPS1 PCKPS0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 INT1PS: INT1 pin remapping control 0: INT1 on PA1 1: INT1 on PC5 Bit 6 INT0PS: INT0 pin remapping control 0: INT0 on PA4 1: INT0 on PC4 Bit 5 TCK1PS: TCK1 pin remapping control 0: TCK1 on PA1 1: TCK1 on PC5 Bit 4 TCK0PS: TCK0 pin remapping control 0: TCK0 on PA4 1: TCK0 on PC4 Bit 3~2 PINTS1~PINTS0: PINT pin remapping control 00: PINT on PB5 01: PINT on PC7 10: PINT on PE0 11: undefined Bit 1~0 PCKPS1~PCKPS0: PCK pin remapping control 00: PCK on PB4 01: PCK on PC6 10: PCK on PE1 11: undefined PRM2 Register – BS85B12-3 Bit Name Rev. 1.20 7 6 5 4 TP1B2PS TP1B1PS TP1B0PS TP1APS 3 2 1 0 — — TP01PS TP00PS R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — — R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 — — 0 0 Bit 7 TP1B2PS: TP1B_2 pin remapping cControl 0: TP1B_2 on PB4 1: TP1B_2 on PC4 Bit 6 TP1B1PS: TP1B_1 pin remapping control 0: TP1B_1 on PB3 1: TP1B_1 on PC3 Bit 5 TP1B0PS: TP1B_0 pin remapping control 0: TP1B_0 on PB2 1: TP1B_0 on PC2 Bit 4 TP1APS: TP1A pin remapping control 0: TP1A on PB5 1: TP1A on PC5 Bit 3~2 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1 TP01PS: TP0_1 Pin Remapping Control 0: TP0_1 on PB1 1: TP0_1 on PC1 Bit 0 TP00PS: TP0_0 Pin Remapping Control 0: TP0_0 on PB0 1: TP0_0 on PC0 64 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver PRM2 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Bit Name 7 6 5 4 TP1B2PS TP1B1PS TP1B0PS TP1APS 3 2 1 0 TP21PS TP20PS TP01PS TP00PS R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 Bit 7 TP1B2PS: TP1B_2 pin remapping control 0: TP1B_2 on PB4 1: TP1B_2 on PC4 Bit 6 TP1B1PS: TP1B_1 pin remapping control 0: TP1B_1 on PB3 1: TP1B_1 on PC3 Bit 5 TP1B0PS: TP1B_0 pin remapping control 0: TP1B_0 on PB2 1: TP1B_0 on PC2 Bit 4 TP1APS: TP1A pin remapping coontrol 0: TP1A on PB5 1: TP1A on PC5 Bit 3 TP21PS: TP2_1 pin remapping coontrol 0: TP2_1 on PB2 1: TP2_1 on PE2 Bit 2 TP20PS: TP2_0 pin remapping coontrol 0: TP2_0 on PB1 1: TP2_0 on PE1 Bit 1 TP01PS: TP0_1 pin remapping coontrol 0: TP0_1 on PB1 1: TP0_1 on PC1 Bit 0 TP00PS: TP0_0 pin remapping coontrol 0: TP0_0 on PB0 1: TP0_0 on PC0 SLCDC3 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 Name TCK2PS — 5 4 3 R/W R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 — 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEG21EN SEG20EN SEG19EN SEG18EN SEG17EN SEG16EN Bit 7 TCK2PS: TCK2 pin remapping control 0: TCK2 on PC6 1: TCK2 on PD0 Bit 6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5~0 described elsewhere 65 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver I/O Pin Structures The accompanying diagrams illustrate the internal structures of some generic I/O pin types. As the exact logical construction of the I/O pin will differ from these drawings, they are supplied as a guide only to assist with the functional understanding of the I/O pins. The wide range of pin-shared structures does not permit all types to be shown. Generic Input/Output Structure Programming Considerations Within the user program, one of the first things to consider is port initialisation. After a reset, all of the I/O data and port control register will be set high. This means that all I/O pins will default to an input state, the level of which depends on the other connected circuitry and whether pull-high selections have been chosen. If the port control register, PAC~PEC, is then programmed to setup some pins as outputs, these output pins will have an initial high output value unless the associated port data register, PA~PE, is first programmed. Selecting which pins are inputs and which are outputs can be achieved byte-wide by loading the correct values into the appropriate port control register or by programming individual bits in the port control register using the "SET [m].i" and "CLR [m].i" instructions. Note that when using these bit control instructions, a read-modify-write operation takes place. The microcontroller must first read in the data on the entire port, modify it to the required new bit values and then rewrite this data back to the output ports. Port A has the additional capability of providing wake-up functions. When the device is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, various methods are available to wake the device up. One of these is a high to low transition of any of the Port A pins. Single or multiple pins on Port A can be setup to have this function. Rev. 1.20 66 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Timer Modules – TM One of the most fundamental functions in any microcontroller device is the ability to control and measure time. To implement time related functions each device includes several Timer Modules, abbreviated to the name TM. The TMs are multi-purpose timing units and serve to provide operations such as Timer/Counter, Input Capture, Compare Match Output and Single Pulse Output as well as being the functional unit for the generation of PWM signals. Each of the TMs has either two or three individual interrupts. The addition of input and output pins for each TM ensures that users are provided with timing units with a wide and flexible range of features. The common features of the different TM types are described here with more detailed information provided in the individual Compact, Standard and Enhanced TM sections. Introduction The devices contain from two to three TMs depending upon which device is selected with each TM having a reference name of TM0, TM1 and TM2. Each individual TM can be categorised as a certain type, namely Compact Type TM, Standard Type TM or Enhanced Type TM. Although similar in nature, the different TM types vary in their feature complexity. The common features to all of the Compact, Standard and Enhanced TMs will be described in this section, the detailed operation regarding each of the TM types will be described in separate sections. The main features and differences between the three types of TMs are summarised in the accompanying table. Function CTM STM ETM Timer/Counter √ √ √ I/P Capture — √ √ Compare Match Output √ √ √ PWM Channels 1 1 2 Single Pulse Output — 1 2 Edge Edge Edge & Centre Duty or Period Duty or Period Duty or Period PWM Alignment PWM Adjustment Period & Duty TM Function Summary Each device in the series contains a specific number of either Compact Type, Standard Type and Enhanced Type TM units which are shown in the table together with their individual reference name, TM0~TM2. Device TM0 TM1 TM2 BS85B12-3 10-bit CTM 10-bit ETM — BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 10-bit CTM 10-bit ETM 10-bit STM TM Name/Type Reference TM Operation The three different types of TM offer a diverse range of functions, from simple timing operations to PWM signal generation. The key to understanding how the TM operates is to see it in terms of a free running counter whose value is then compared with the value of pre-programmed internal comparators. When the free running counter has the same value as the pre-programmed comparator, known as a compare match situation, a TM interrupt signal will be generated which can clear the counter and perhaps also change the condition of the TM output pin. The internal TM counter is driven by a user selectable clock source, which can be an internal clock or an external pin. Rev. 1.20 67 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TM Clock Source The clock source which drives the main counter in each TM can originate from various sources. The selection of the required clock source is implemented using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits in the TM control registers. The clock source can be a ratio of either the system clock fSYS or the internal high clock fH, the fTBC clock source or the external TCKn pin. Note that setting these bits to the value 101 will select a reserved clock input, in effect disconnecting the TM clock source. The TCKn pin clock source is used to allow an external signal to drive the TM as an external clock source or for event counting. TM Interrupts The Compact and Standard type TMs each have two internal interrupts, one for each of the internal comparator A or comparator P, which generate a TM interrupt when a compare match condition occurs. As the Enhanced type TM has three internal comparators and comparator A or comparator B or comparator P compare match functions, it consequently has three internal interrupts. When a TM interrupt is generated it can be used to clear the counter and also to change the state of the TM output pin. TM External Pins Each of the TMs, irrespective of what type, has one TM input pin, with the label TCKn. The TM input pin, is essentially a clock source for the TM and is selected using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits in the TMnC0 register. This external TM input pin allows an external clock source to drive the internal TM. This external TM input pin is shared with other functions but will be connected to the internal TM if selected using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits. The TM input pin can be chosen to have either a rising or falling active edge. The TMs each have one or more output pins with the label TPn. When the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode, these pins can be controlled by the TM to switch to a high or low level or to toggle when a compare match situation occurs. The external TPn output pin is also the pin where the TM generates the PWM output waveform. As the TM output pins are pin-shared with other function, the TM output function must first be setup using registers. A single bit in one of the registers determines if its associated pin is to be used as an external TM output pin or if it is to have another function. The number of output pins for each TM type and device is different, the details are provided in the accompanying table. All TM output pin names have an "_n" suffix. Pin names that include a "_1" or "_2" suffix indicate that they are from a TM with multiple output pins. This allows the TM to generate a complimentary output pair, selected using the I/O register data bits. Device CTM STM ETM Registers TMPC0 TMPC0, TMPC1 BS85B12-3 TP0_0, TP0_1 — TP1A, TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 TP0_0, TP0_1 TP2_0, TP2_1 TP1A, TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 TM Output Pins Rev. 1.20 68 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TM Input/Output Pin Control Registers Selecting to have a TM input/output or whether to retain its other shared function, is implemented using one or two registers, with a single bit in each register corresponding to a TM input/output pin. Setting the bit high will setup the corresponding pin as a TM input/output, if reset to zero the pin will retain its original other function. Registers Device TMPC0 TMPC0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 All T1ACP0 T1BCP2 T1BCP1 T1BCP0 — — T0CP1 T0CP0 BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 — — — — — — T2CP1 T2CP0 TM Input/Output Pin Control Registers List TMPC0 Register – All devices Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T1ACP0 T1BCP2 T1BCP1 T1BCP0 — — T0CP1 T0CP0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — — R/W R/W POR 1 0 0 1 — — 0 1 Bit 7 T1ACP0: TP1A pin Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 6 T1BCP2: TP1B_2 pin Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 5 T1BCP1: TP1B_1 pin Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 4 T1BCP0: TP1B_0 pin Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 3~2 Unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1 T0CP1: TP0_1 pin Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 0 T0CP0: TP0_0 pin Control 0: disable 1: enable TMPC1 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 3 2 1 0 Name — — 5 4 — — T2CP1 T2CP0 R/W — — — — R/W R/W POR — — — — 0 1 Bit 7~2 Unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1 T2CP1: TP2_1 pin control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 0 T2CP0: TP2_0 pin control 0: disable 1: enable 69 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TM0 Function Pin Control Block Diagram Note: 1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control. 2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one TM input. TM2 Function Pin Control Block Diagram – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 only Note: 1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control. 2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one TM input. Rev. 1.20 70 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver 0 P B 5 o r P C 5 O u tp u t F u n c tio n T P 1 A 1 C C R A O u tp u t P B 5 o r P C 5 T 1 A C P 0 1 C C R A C a p tu re In p u t 0 T 1 A C P 0 T P 1 B _ 0 P B 2 o r P C 2 O u tp u t F u n c tio n 0 1 0 1 P B 2 o r P C 2 T 1 B C P 0 P B 2 o r P C 2 P B 3 o r P C 3 T P 1 B _ 1 O u tp u t F u n c tio n 0 1 0 1 P B 3 o r P C 3 T 1 B C P 1 P B 3 o r P C 3 P B 4 o r P C 4 O u tp u t F u n c tio n C C R B O u tp u t 0 1 0 1 P B 4 o r P C 4 T 1 B C P 2 P B 4 o r P C 4 1 C C R B C a p tu re In p u t 0 T 1 B C P 2 1 0 T 1 B C P 1 1 0 T 1 B C P 0 T C K In p u t P A 4 /T C K 1 TM1 Function Pin Control Block Diagram Note: 1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control. 2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one TM input. Rev. 1.20 71 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Programming Considerations The TM Counter Registers and the Capture/Compare CCRA and CCRB registers, being either 10bit or 16-bit, all have a low and high byte structure. The high bytes can be directly accessed, but as the low bytes can only be accessed via an internal 8-bit buffer, reading or writing to these register pairs must be carried out in a specific way. The important point to note is that data transfer to and from the 8-bit buffer and its related low byte only takes place when a write or read operation to its corresponding high byte is executed. As the CCRA and CCRB registers are implemented in the way shown in the following diagram and accessing these register pairs is carried out in a specific way as described above, it is recommended to use the "MOV" instruction to access the CCRA and CCRB low byte registers, named TMxAL and TMxBL, using the following access procedures. Accessing the CCRA or CCRB low byte registers without following these access procedures will result in unpredictable values. The following steps show the read and write procedures: • Writing Data to CCRB or CCRA ♦♦ Step 1. Write data to Low Byte TMxAL or TMxBL – note that here data is only written to the 8-bit buffer. ♦♦ Step 2. Write data to High Byte TMxAH or TMxBH – here data is written directly to the high byte registers and simultaneously data is latched from the 8-bit buffer to the Low Byte registers. • Reading Data from the Counter Registers and CCRB or CCRA Rev. 1.20 ♦♦ Step 1. Read data from the High Byte TMxDH, TMxAH or TMxBH – here data is read directly from the High Byte registers and simultaneously data is latched from the Low Byte register into the 8-bit buffer. ♦♦ Step 2. Read data from the Low Byte TMxDL, TMxAL or TMxBL – this step reads data from the 8-bit buffer. 72 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Compact Type TM – CTM Although the simplest form of the three TM types, the Compact TM type still contains three operating modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/Event Counter and PWM Output modes. The Compact TM can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive one or two external output pins. These two external output pins can be the same signal or the inverse signal. CTM Name TM No. TM Input Pin TM Output Pin BS85B12-3 10-bit CTM 0 TCK0 TP0_0, TP0_1 BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 10-bit CTM 0 TCK0 TP0_0, TP0_1 Compact TM Operation At its core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock source. There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA registers. The CCRP is three bits wide whose value is compared with the highest three bits in the counter while the CCRA is the ten bits and therefore compares with all counter bits. The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to clear the counter by changing the TnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators. When these conditions occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Compact Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock sources including an input pin and can also control an output pin. All operating setup conditions are selected using relevant internal registers. Compact Type TM Block Diagram Rev. 1.20 73 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Compact Type TM Register Description Overall operation of the Compact TM is controlled using six registers. A read only register pair exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store the internal 10-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the different operating and control modes as well as the three CCRP bits. Name Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 TMnC0 TnPAU TnCK2 TnCK1 TnCK0 TnON TnRP2 TnRP1 TnRP0 TMnC1 TnM1 TnM0 TnIO1 TnIO0 TnOC TnPOL TnDPX TnCCLR TMnDL D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TMnDH — — — — — — D9 D8 TMnAL D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TMnAH — — — — — — D9 D8 Compact TM Register List (n=0) TMnDL Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R R R R R R R R POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 TMnDL: TMn Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0 TMn 10-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0 TMnDH Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — D9 D8 R/W — — — — — — R R POR — — — — — — 0 0 Bit 7~2 Unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 TMnDH: TMn Counter High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0 TMn 10-bit Counter bit 9 ~ bit 8 TMnAL Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 TMnAL: TMn CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0 TMn 10-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0 TMnAH Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — D9 D8 R/W — — — — — — R/W R/W POR — — — — — — 0 0 Bit 7~2 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 TMn 10-bit CCRA bit 9 ~ bit 8 74 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TMnC0 Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TnPAU TnCK2 TnCK1 TnCK0 TnON TnRP2 TnRP1 TnRP0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 TnPAU: TMn Counter Pause Control 0: run 1: pause The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit changes to a low value again. Bit 6~4 TnCK2~TnCK0: Select TMn Counter clock 000: fSYS/4 001: fSYS 010: fH/16 011: fH/64 100: fTBC 101: undefined 110: TCKn rising edge clock 111: TCKn falling edge clock These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. Selecting the Reserved clock input will effectively disable the internal counter. The external pin clock source can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is the system clock, while fH and fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can be found in the oscillator section. Bit 3 TnON: TMn Counter On/Off Control 0: Off 1: On This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the counter to run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the counter from counting and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption. When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal counter will retain its residual value. If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM output pin will be reset to its initial condition, as specified by the TnOC bit, when the TnON bit changes from low to high. Bit 2~0 TnRP2~TnRP0: TMn CCRP 3-bit register, compared with the TMn Counter bit 9~bit 7 Comparator P Match Period 000: 1024 TMn clocks 001: 128 TMn clocks 010: 256 TMn clocks 011: 384 TMn clocks 100: 512 TMn clocks 101: 640 TMn clocks 110: 768 TMn clocks 111: 896 TMn clocks These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which are then compared with the internal counter's highest three bits. The result of this comparison can be selected to clear the internal counter if the TnCCLR bit is set to zero. Setting the TnCCLR bit to zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP values will reset the internal counter. As the CCRP bits are only compared with the highest three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128 clock cycle multiples. Clearing all three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at its maximum value. 75 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TMnC1 Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TnM1 TnM0 TnIO1 TnIO0 TnOC TnPOL TnDPX TnCCLR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 Bit 5~4 Bit 3 Rev. 1.20 TnM1~TnM0: Select TMn Operating Mode 00: Compare Match Output Mode 01: Undefined 10: PWM Mode 11: Timer/Counter Mode These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation the TM should be switched off before any changes are made to the TnM1 and TnM0 bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled. TnIO1~TnIO0: Select TPn_0, TPn_1 output function Compare Match Output Mode 00: No change 01: Output low 10: Output high 11: Toggle output PWM Mode 00: PWM output inactive state 01: PWM output active state 10: PWM output 11: Undefined Timer/counter Mode unused These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which mode the TM is running. In the Compare Match Output Mode, the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The TM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the TM output pin should be setup using the TnOC bit in the TMnC1 register. Note that the output level requested by the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits must be different from the initial value setup using the TnOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin when a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be reset to its initial level by changing the level of the TnON bit from low to high. In the PWM Mode, the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits only after the TMn has been switched off. Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are changed when the TM is running TnOC: TPn_0, TPn_1 Output control bit Compare Match Output Mode 0: Initial low 1: Initial high PWM Mode 0: Active low 1: Active high This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon whether TM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of the TM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low. 76 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Bit 2 TnPOL: TPn_0, TPn_1 Output polarity Control 0: Non-invert 1: Invert This bit controls the polarity of the TPn_0 or TPn_1 output pin. When the bit is set high the TM output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. Bit 1 TnDPX: TMn PWM period/duty Control 0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty 1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and duty control of the PWM waveform. Bit 0 TnCCLR: Select TMn Counter clear condition 0: TMn Comparatror P match 1: TMn Comparatror A match This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the Compact TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of which can be selected to clear the internal counter. With the TnCCLR bit set high, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The TnCCLR bit is not used in the PWM Mode. Compact Type TM Operating Modes The Compact Type TM can operate in one of three operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode, PWM Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The operating mode is selected using the TnM1 and TnM0 bits in the TMnC1 register. Compare Match Output Mode To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register, should be set to "00" respectively. In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P. When the TnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when a compare match occurs from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows the counter to overflow. Here both TnAF and TnPF interrupt request flags for the Comparator A and Comparator P respectively, will both be generated. If the TnCCLR bit in the TMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the TnAF interrupt request flag will be generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when TnCCLR is high no TnPF interrupt request flag will be generated. If the CCRA bits are all zero, the counter will overflow when its reaches its maximum 10-bit, 3FF Hex, value, however here the TnAF interrupt request flag will not be generated. Rev. 1.20 77 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin will change state. The TM output pin condition however only changes state when an TnAF interrupt request flag is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The TnPF interrupt request flag, generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output pin. The way in which the TM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the TnON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the TnOC bit. Note that if the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are zero then no pin change will take place. Co�nter overflow Co�nter Val�e TnCCLR = 0; TnM[1:0] = 00 CCRP > 0 Co�nter cleared by CCRP val�e CCRP = 0 CCRP > 0 0x3FF CCRP Pa�se Res�me Stop CCR� Co�nter Reset Time TnON TnP�U Tn�POL CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F TM O/P Pin O�tp�t Pin set to Initial Level Low if TnOC = 0 O�tp�t To��le with Tn�F fla� Now TnIO [1:0] = 10 �ctive Hi�h O�tp�t Select O�tp�t not affected by Tn�F fla�. Remains Hi�h �ntil reset by TnON bit Here TnIO [1:0] = 11 To��le O�tp�t Select O�tp�t inverts when TnPOL is hi�h O�tp�t Pin Reset to initial val�e O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 0 Note: 1. With TnCCLR=0, a Comparator P match will clear the counter 2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag 3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge Rev. 1.20 78 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TnCCLR = 1; TnM [1:0] = 00 Co�nter Val�e CCR� = 0 Co�nter overflows CCR� > 0 Co�nter cleared by CCR� val�e 0x3FF CCR� = 0 CCR� Pa�se Res�me Stop CCRP Co�nter Reset Time TnON TnP�U TnPOL No Tn�F fla� �enerated on CCR� overflow CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF TM O/P Pin TnPF not �enerated O�tp�t Pin set to Initial Level Low if TnOC = 0 O�tp�t does not chan�e O�tp�t not affected by Tn�F fla� remains Hi�h �ntil reset by TnON bit O�tp�t To��le with Tn�F fla� Now TnIO [1:0] = 10 �ctive Hi�h O�tp�t Select Here TnIO [1:0] = 11 To��le O�tp�t Select O�tp�t inverts when TnPOL is hi�h O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction O�tp�t Pin Reset to initial val�e Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 1 Note: 1. With TnCCLR=1, a Comparator A match will clear the counter 2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag 3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge 4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1 Timer/Counter Mode To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 11 respectively. The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode, the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function. Rev. 1.20 79 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver PWM Output Mode To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 10 respectively. The PWM function within the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control, heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty cycle on the TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent DC RMS values. As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the TnCCLR bit has no effect on the PWM operation. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one register is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while the other one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either frequency or duty cycle is determined using the TnDPX bit in the TMnC1 register. The PWM waveform frequency and duty cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers. An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The TnOC bit in the TMnC1 register is used to select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are used to enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The TnPOL bit is used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform. Co�nter Val�e Co�nter Cleared by CCRP TnDPX = 0; TnM [1:0] = 10 CCRP Pa�se Res�me Co�nter reset Co�nter Stop when TnON if TnON bit low ret�rns hi�h CCR� Time TnON TnP�U TnPOL CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF TM O/P Pin TnOC = 1 TM O/P Pin TnOC = 0 PWM D�ty Cycle set by CCR� PWM Period set by CCRP PWM res�mes operation O�tp�t controlled by O�tp�t Inverts other pin-shared f�nction When TnPOL = 1 PWM Mode – TnDPX = 0 Note: 1. Here TnDPX=0 -- Counter cleared by CCRP 2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period 3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01 4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation Rev. 1.20 80 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Co�nter Cleared by CCR� Co�nter Val�e TnDPX = 1; TnM [1:0] = 10 CCR� Co�nter reset Co�nter Stop when TnON if TnON bit low ret�rns hi�h Pa�se Res�me CCRP Time TnON TnP�U TnPOL CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF TM O/P Pin TnOC = 1 TM O/P Pin TnOC = 0 PWM res�mes operation PWM D�ty Cycle set by CCRP O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction PWM Period set by CCR� O�tp�t Inverts When TnPOL = 1 PWM Mode – TnDPX = 1 Note: 1. Here TnDPX = 1 -- Counter cleared by CCRA 2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period 3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01 4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation CTM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T0DPX=0 CCRP 001b 010b 011b 100b 101b 110b 111b 000b Period 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 Duty CCRA If fSYS = 16MHz, TM clock source is fSYS/4, CCRP = 100b and CCRA =128, The CTM PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4) / 512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125 kHz, duty = 128/512 = 25%. If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the PWM output duty is 100%. CTM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T0DPX=1 CCRP 001b 010b 011b 100b 110b 111b 000b 768 896 1024 CCRA Period Duty 101b 128 256 384 512 640 The output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the TM clock while the PWM duty cycle is defined by the CCRP register value. Rev. 1.20 81 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Standard Type TM – STM The Standard Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/ Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Standard TM can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive one or two external output pins. CTM Name TM No. TM Input Pin TM Output Pin BS85B12-3 — — — — BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 10-bit STM 2 TCK2 TP2_0, TP2_1 Standard TM Operation At its core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock source. There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA registers. The CCRP is three bits wide whose value is compared with the highest three bits in the counter while the CCRA is the ten bits and therefore compares with all counter bits. The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to clear the counter by changing the TnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators. When these conditions occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Standard Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock sources including an input pin and can also control an output pin. All operating setup conditions are selected using relevant internal registers. Standard Type TM Block Diagram Rev. 1.20 82 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Standard Type TM Register Description Overall operation of the Standard TM is controlled using a series of registers. A read only register pair exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store the internal 10-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the different operating and control modes as well as the three CCRP bits. STM Register List Name Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 TM2C0 T2PAU T2CK2 T2CK1 T2CK0 T2ON T2RP2 T2RP1 T2RP0 TM2C1 T2M1 T2M0 T2IO1 T2IO0 T2OC T2POL T2DPX T2CCLR TM2DL D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TM2DH — — — — — — D9 D8 TM2AL D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TM2AH — — — — — — D9 D8 10-bit Standard TM Register List TM2C0 Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T2PAU T2CK2 T2CK1 T2CK0 T2ON T2RP2 T2RP1 T2RP0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 T2PAU: TM2 Counter Pause Control 0: run 1: pause The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit changes to a low value again. Bit 6~4 T2CK2~T2CK0: Select TM2 Counter clock 000: fSYS/4 001: fSYS 010: fH/16 011: fH/64 100: fTBC 101: undefined 110: TCK2 rising edge clock 111: TCK2 falling edge clock These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. Selecting the Reserved clock input will effectively disable the internal counter. The external pin clock source can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is the system clock, while fH and fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can be found in the oscillator section. Bit 3 T2ON: TM2 Counter On/Off Control 0: Off 1: On This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the counter to run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the counter from counting and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption. When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal counter will retain its residual value until the bit returns high again. 83 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM output pin will be reset to its initial condition, as specified by the T2OC bit, when the T2ON bit changes from low to high. Bit 2~0 T2RP2~T2RP0: TM2 CCRP 3-bit register, compared with the TM2 Counter bit 9~bit 7 Comparator P Match Period 000: 1024 TM2 clocks 001: 128 TM2 clocks 010: 256 TM2 clocks 011: 384 TM2 clocks 100: 512 TM2 clocks 101: 640 TM2 clocks 110: 768 TM2 clocks 111: 896 TM2 clocks These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which are then compared with the internal counter's highest three bits. The result of this comparison can be selected to clear the internal counter if the T2CCLR bit is set to zero. Setting the T2CCLR bit to zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP values will reset the internal counter. As the CCRP bits are only compared with the highest three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128 clock cycle multiples. Clearing all three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at its maximum value. TM2C1 Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T2M1 T2M0 T2IO1 T2IO0 T2OC T2POL T2DPX T2CCLR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 T2M1~T2M0: Select TM2 Operating Mode 00: Compare Match Output Mode 01: Capture Input Mode 10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode 11: Timer/Counter Mode These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation the TM should be switched off before any changes are made to the T2M1 and T2M0 bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled. Bit 5~4 T2IO1~T2IO0: Select TP2_0, TP2_1 output function Compare Match Output Mode 00: No change 01: Output low 10: Output high 11: Toggle output PWM Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode 00: PWM output inactive state 01: PWM output active state 10: PWM output 11: Single pulse output Capture Input Mode 00: Input capture at rising edge of TP2_0, TP2_1 01: Input capture at falling edge of TP2_0, TP2_1 10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TP2_0, TP2_1 11: Input capture disabled Timer/counter Mode: Unused 84 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which mode the TM is running. In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The TM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the TM output pin should be setup using the T2OC bit in the TM2C1 register. Note that the output level requested by the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits must be different from the initial value setup using the T2OC bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin when a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be reset to its initial level by changing the level of the T2ON bit from low to high. In the PWM Mode, the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits only after the TM has been switched off. Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits are changed when the TM is running Rev. 1.20 Bit 3 T2OC: TP2_0, TP2_1 Output control bit Compare Match Output Mode 0: initial low 1: initial high PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode 0: Active low 1: Active high This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon whether TM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of the TM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low. Bit 2 T2POL: TP2_0, TP2_1 Output polarity Control 0: non-invert 1: invert This bit controls the polarity of the TP2_0 or TP2_1 output pin. When the bit is set high the TM output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. Bit 1 T2DPX: TM1 PWM period/duty Control 0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty 1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and duty control of the PWM waveform. Bit 0 T2CCLR: Select TM1 Counter clear condition 0: TM2 Comparatror P match 1: TM2 Comparatror A match This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the Standard TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of which can be selected to clear the internal counter. With the T2CCLR bit set high, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The T2CCLR bit is not used in the PWM, Single Pulse or Input Capture Mode. 85 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TM2DL Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R R R R R R R R POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 TM2DL: TM2 Counter Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0 TM2 10-bit Counter bit 7~bit 0 TM2DH Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — D9 D8 R/W — — — — — — R R POR — — — — — — 0 0 2 1 0 Bit 7~2 Unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 TM2DH: TM2 Counter High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0 TM2 10-bit Counter bit 9~bit 8 TM2AL Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 TM2AL: TM2 CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0 TM2 10-bit CCRA bit 7~bit 0 TM2AH Registe Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — D9 D8 R/W — — — — — — R/W R/W POR — — — — — — 0 0 Bit 7~2 Unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 TM2AH: TM2 CCRA High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0 TM2 10-bit CCRA bit 9~bit 8 86 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Standard Type TM Operating Modes The Standard Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode, PWM Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The operating mode is selected using the TnM1 and TnM0 bits in the TMnC1 register. Compare Match Output Mode To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register, should be set to 00 respectively. In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P. When the TnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when a compare match from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows the counter to overflow. Here both TnAF and TnPF interrupt request flags for Comparator A and Comparator P respectively, will both be generated. If the TnCCLR bit in the TMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the TnAF interrupt request flag will be generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when TnCCLR is high no TnPF interrupt request flag will be generated. In the Compare Match Output Mode, the CCRA can not be set to 0. Co�nter overflow Co�nter Val�e TnCCLR = 0; TnM[1:0] = 00 CCRP = 0 CCRP > 0 Co�nter cleared by CCRP val�e CCRP > 0 0x3FF CCRP Pa�se Res�me Stop CCR� Co�nter Reset Time TnON TnP�U Tn�POL CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F TM O/P Pin O�tp�t Pin set to Initial Level Low if TnOC = 0 O�tp�t To��le with Tn�F fla� Now TnIO [1:0] = 10 �ctive Hi�h O�tp�t Select O�tp�t not affected by Tn�F fla�. Remains Hi�h �ntil reset by TnON bit Here TnIO [1:0] = 11 To��le O�tp�t Select O�tp�t inverts when TnPOL is hi�h O�tp�t Pin Reset to initial val�e O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 0 Note: 1. With TnCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter 2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag 3. The output pin is reset to itsinitial state by a TnON bit rising edge Rev. 1.20 87 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin, will change state. The TM output pin condition however only changes state when a TnAF interrupt request flag is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The TnPF interrupt request flag, generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output pin. The way in which the TM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the TnON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the TnOC bit. Note that if the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are zero then no pin change will take place. Timer/Counter Mode To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 11 respectively. The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode, the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function. TnCCLR = 1; TnM [1:0] = 00 Co�nter Val�e CCR� = 0 Co�nter overflows CCR� > 0 Co�nter cleared by CCR� val�e 0x3FF CCR� = 0 CCR� Pa�se Res�me Stop CCRP Co�nter Reset Time TnON TnP�U TnPOL No Tn�F fla� �enerated on CCR� overflow CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF TM O/P Pin TnPF not �enerated O�tp�t Pin set to Initial Level Low if TnOC = 0 O�tp�t does not chan�e O�tp�t not affected by Tn�F fla� remains Hi�h �ntil reset by TnON bit O�tp�t To��le with Tn�F fla� O�tp�t inverts when TnPOL is hi�h O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction O�tp�t Pin Reset to initial val�e Now TnIO [1:0] = 10 �ctive Hi�h O�tp�t Select Here TnIO [1:0] = 11 To��le O�tp�t Select Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 1 Note: 1. With TnCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter 2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag 3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge 4. A TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1 Rev. 1.20 88 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver PWM Output Mode To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 10 respectively. The PWM function within the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control, heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty cycle on the TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent DC RMS values. As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the TnCCLR bit has no effect on the PWM operation. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one register is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while the other one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either frequency or duty cycle is determined using the TnDPX bit in the TMnC1 register. The PWM waveform frequency and duty cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers. An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The TnOC bit in the TMnC1 register is used to select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are used to enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The TnPOL bit is used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform. STM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, TnDPX=0 CCRP 001b 010b 011b 100b 101b 110b 111b 000b Period 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 Duty CCRA If fSYS = 16MHz, TM clock source is fSYS/4, CCRP = 100b and CCRA =128, The STM PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4) / 512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125 kHz, duty = 128/512 = 25%. If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the PWM output duty is 100%. STM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, TnDPX=1 CCRP 001b 010b 011b 100b Duty 101b 110b 111b 000b 768 896 1024 CCRA Period 128 256 384 512 640 The PWM output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the TM clock while the PWM duty cycle is defined by the CCRP register value. Rev. 1.20 89 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Co�nter Val�e Co�nter Cleared by CCRP TnDPX = 0; TnM [1:0] = 10 CCRP Pa�se Res�me Co�nter reset Co�nter Stop when TnON if TnON bit low ret�rns hi�h CCR� Time TnON TnP�U TnPOL CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF TM O/P Pin TnOC = 1 TM O/P Pin TnOC = 0 PWM D�ty Cycle set by CCR� PWM Period set by CCRP PWM res�mes operation O�tp�t controlled by O�tp�t Inverts other pin-shared f�nction When TnPOL = 1 PWM Mode – TnDPX = 0 Note: 1. Here TnDPX=0 – Counter cleared by CCRP 2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period 3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01 4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation Rev. 1.20 90 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Co�nter Val�e Co�nter Cleared by CCR� TnDPX = 1; TnM [1:0] = 10 CCR� Pa�se Res�me Co�nter reset Co�nter Stop when TnON if TnON bit low ret�rns hi�h CCRP Time TnON TnP�U TnPOL CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF TM O/P Pin TnOC = 1 TM O/P Pin TnOC = 0 PWM res�mes operation PWM D�ty Cycle set by CCRP PWM Period set by CCR� O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction O�tp�t Inverts When TnPOL = 1 PWM Mode – TnDPX = 1 Note: 1. Here TnDPX=1 – Counter cleared by CCRA 2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period 3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01 4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation Single Pulse Mode To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 10 respectively and also the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits should be set to 11 respectively. The Single Pulse Output Mode, as the name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse on the TM output pin. The trigger for the pulse output leading edge is a low to high transition of the TnON bit, which can be implemented using the application program. However in the Single Pulse Mode, the TnON bit can also be made to automatically change from low to high using the external TCKn pin, which will in turn initiate the Single Pulse output. When the TnON bit transitions to a high level, the counter will start running and the pulse leading edge will be generated. The TnON bit should remain high when the pulse is in its active state. The generated pulse trailing edge will be generated when the TnON bit is cleared to zero, which can be implemented using the application program or when a compare match occurs from Comparator A. Rev. 1.20 91 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Single Pulse Generation However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the TnON bit and thus generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge. In this way the CCRA value can be used to control the pulse width. A compare match from Comparator A will also generate a TM interrupt. The counter can only be reset back to zero when the TnON bit changes from low to high when the counter restarts. In the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The TnCCLR and TnDPX bits are not used in this Mode. TnM [1:0] = 10; TnIO [1:0] = 11 Co�nter Stopped by CCR� Co�nter Val�e CCR� Pa�se Co�nter reset Co�nter Stops when TnON by software ret�rns hi�h Res�me CCRP Time TnON Software Tri��er TCn pin Cleared by CCR� match ��to. set by TCKn pin Software Tri��er Software Tri��er Software Clear Software Tri��er TCKn pin Tri��er TnP�U TnPOL No CCRP Interr�pt �enerated CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F TnIO1� TnIO0 = 00 O�tp�t Inactive TnIO1� TnIO0 = 11 Sin�le P�lse O�tp�t TnIO1� TnIO0 = 11 TM O/P Pin TnOC = 1 TM O/P Pin TnOC = 0 O�tp�t Inverts When TnPOL = 1 P�lse Width set by CCR� Single Pulse Mode Note: 1. Counter stopped by CCRA 2. CCRP is not used 3. The pulse is triggered by the TCKn pin or by setting the TnON bit high 4. A TCKn pin active edge will automatically set the TnON bit high 5. In the Single Pulse Mode, TnIO [1:0] must be set to "11" and can not be changed. Rev. 1.20 92 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Capture Input Mode To select this mode bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 01 respectively. This mode enables external signals to capture and store the present value of the internal counter and can therefore be used for applications such as pulse width measurements. The external signal is supplied on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin, whose active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or both rising and falling edges; the active edge transition type is selected using the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register. The counter is started when the TnON bit changes from low to high which is initiated using the application program. When the required edge transition appears on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin, the present value in the counter will be latched into the CCRA registers and a TM interrupt generated. Irrespective of what events occur on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin the counter will continue to free run until the TnON bit changes from high to low. When a CCRP compare match occurs, the counter will reset back to zero; in this way the CCRP value can be used to control the maximum counter value. When a CCRP compare match occurs from Comparator P, a TM interrupt will also be generated. Counting the number of overflow interrupt signals from the CCRP can be a useful method in measuring long pulse widths. The TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits can select the active trigger edge on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin to be a rising edge, falling edge or both edge types. If the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are both set high, then no capture operation will take place irrespective of what happens on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin, however it must be noted that the counter will continue to run. As the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin is pin shared with other functions, care must be taken if the TM is in the Input Capture Mode. This is because if the pin is setup as an output, then any transitions on this pin may cause an input capture operation to be executed. The TnCCLR and TnDPX bits are not used in this Mode. Co�nter Val�e TnM [1:0] = 01 Co�nter overflow CCRP Stop Co�nter Reset YY Pa�se XX Res�me Time TnON TnP�U TM Capt�re Pin TPn ed�e �ctive ed�e �ctive ed�e �ctive CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF CCR� Val�e TnIO [1:0] Val�e XX 00 - Risin� ed�e YY 01 - Fallin� ed�e XX 10 - Both ed�es YY 11 - Disable Capt�re Capture Input Mode Note: 1.. TnM [1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnIO [1:0] bits 2. A TM Capture input pin active edge transfers the counter value to CCRA 3. TnCCLR bit not used 4. No output function -- TnOC and TnPOL bits are not used 5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP is equal to zero. Rev. 1.20 93 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Enhanced Type TM – ETM The Enhanced Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/ Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Enhanced TM can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive three or four external output pins. CTM Name TM No. TM Input Pin TM Output Pin BS85B12-3 10-bit ETM 1 TCK1 TP1A, TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 10-bit ETM 1 TCK1 TP1A, TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 Enhanced TM Operation At its core is a 10-bit count-up/count-down counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock source. There are three internal comparators with the names, Comparator A, Comparator B and Comparator P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with the CCRA, CCRB and CCRP registers. The CCRP comparator is 3-bits wide whose value is compared with the highest 3-bits in the counter while CCRA and CCRB are 10-bits wide and therefore compared with all counter bits. The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to clear the counter by changing the TnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators. When these conditions occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Enhanced Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock sources including an input pin and can also control output pins. All operating setup conditions are selected using relevant internal registers. Enhanced Type TM Block Diagram Rev. 1.20 94 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Enhanced Type TM Register Description Overall operation of the Enhanced TM is controlled using a series of registers. A read only register pair exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while two read/write register pairs exist to store the internal 10-bit CCRA and CCRB value. The remaining three registers are control registers which setup the different operating and control modes as well as the three CCRP bits. Name Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 TM1C0 T1PAU T1CK2 T1CK1 T1CK0 T1ON T1RP2 T1RP1 T1RP0 T1CDN T1CCLR TM1C1 T1AM1 T1AM0 T1AIO1 T1AIO0 T1AOC T1APOL TM1C2 T1BM1 T1BM0 T1BIO1 T1BIO0 T1BOC T1BPOL T1PWM1 T1PWM0 TM1DL D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 TM1DH — — — — — — D9 D0 D8 TM1AL D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TM1AH — — — — — — D9 D8 TM1BL D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TM1BH — — — — — — D9 D8 10-bit Enhanced TM Register List 10-bit Enhanced TM Register List • TM1C0 Register – 10-bit ETM Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T1PAU T1CK2 T1CK1 T1CK0 T1ON T1RP2 T1RP1 T1RP0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 T1PAU: TM1 Counter Pause Control 0: run 1: pause The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit changes to a low value again. Bit 6~4 T1CK2~T1CK0: Select TM1 Counter clock 000: fSYS/4 001: fSYS 010: fH/16 011: fH/64 100: fTBC 101: Undefined 110: TCK1 rising edge clock 111: TCK1 falling edge clock These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. Selecting the Reserved clock input will effectively disable the internal counter. The external pin clock source can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is the system clock, while fH and fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can be found in the oscillator section. 95 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Bit 3 T1ON: TM1 Counter On/Off Control 0: Off 1: On This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the counter to run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the counter from counting and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption. When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal counter will retain its residual value until the bit returns high again. If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM output pin will be reset to its initial condition, as specified by the T1OC bit, when the T1ON bit changes from low to high. Bit 2~0 T1RP2~T1RP0: TM1 3-bit register, compared with the TM1 Counter bit 9~bit 7 Comparator P Match Period 000: 1024 TM1 clocks 001: 128 TM1 clocks 010: 256 TM1 clocks 011: 384 TM1 clocks 100: 512 TM1 clocks 101: 640 TM1 clocks 110: 768 TM1 clocks 111: 896 TM1 clocks These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which are then compared with the internal counter's highest three bits. The result of this comparison can be selected to clear the internal counter if the T1CCLR bit is set to zero. Setting the T1CCLR bit to zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP values will reset the internal counter. As the CCRP bits are only compared with the highest three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128 clock cycle multiples. Clearing all three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at its maximum value. • TM1C1 Register – 10-bit ETM Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T1AM1 T1AM0 T1AIO1 T1AIO0 T1AOC T1APOL T1CDN T1CCLR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 Bit 5~4 Rev. 1.20 T1AM1~T1AM0: Select TM1 CCRA Operating Mode 00: Compare Match Output Mode 01: Capture Input Mode 10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode 11: Timer/Counter Mode These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation the TM should be switched off before any changes are made to the T1AM1 and T1AM0 bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled. T1AIO1~T1AIO0: Select TP1A output function Compare Match Output Mode 00: No change 01: Output low 10: Output high 11: Toggle output Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode 00: PWM output inactive state 01: PWM output active state 10: PWM output 11: Single pulse output 96 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Rev. 1.20 Capture Input Mode 00: Input capture at rising edge of TP1A 01: Input capture at falling edge of TP1A 10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TP1A 11: Input capture disabled Timer/counter Mode Unused These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which mode the TM is running. In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The TM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the TM output pin should be setup using the T1AOC bit in the TM1C1 register. Note that the output level requested by the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits must be different from the initial value setup using the T1AOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin when a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be reset to its initial level by changing the level of the T1ON bit from low to high. In the PWM Mode, the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits only after the TM has been switched off. Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits are changed when the TM is running T1AOC: TP1A Output control bit Compare Match Output Mode 0: Initial low 1: Initial high Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode 0: Active low 1: Active high This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon whether TM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of the TM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low. T1APOL: TP1A Output polarity Control 0: Non-invert 1: Invert This bit controls the polarity of the TP1A output pin. When the bit is set high the TM output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. T1CDN: TM1 Counter count up or down flag 0: Count up 1: Count down T1CCLR: Select TM1 Counter clear condition 0: TM1 Comparator P match 1: TM1 Comparator A match This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the Enhanced TM contains three comparators, Comparator A, Comparator B and Comparator P, but only Comparator A or Comparator Pan be selected to clear the internal counter. With the T1CCLR bit set high, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The T1CCLR bit is not used in the Single Pulse or Input Capture Mode. 97 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver • TM1C2 Register – 10-bit ETM Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Name T1BM1 T1BM0 T1BIO1 T1BIO0 T1BOC T1BPOL 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T1PWM1 T1PWM0 Bit 7~6 T1BM1~T1BM0: Select TM1 CCRB Operating Mode 00: Compare Match Output Mode 01: Capture Input Mode 10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode 11: Timer/Counter mode These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation the TM should be switched off before any changes are made to the T1BM1 and T1BM0 bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled. Bit 5~4 T1BIO1~T1BIO0: Select TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 output function Compare Match Output Mode 00: No change 01: Output low 10: Output high 11: Toggle output Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode 00: PWM output inactive state 01: PWM output active state 10: PWM output 11: Single pulse output Capture Input Mode 00: Input capture at rising edge of TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 01: Input capture at falling edge of TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 11: Input capture disabled Timer/counter Mode Unused These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which mode the TM is running. In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The TM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the TM output pin should be setup using the T1BOC bit in the TM1C2 register. Note that the output level requested by the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits must be different from the initial value setup using the T1BOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin when a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be reset to its initial level by changing the level of the T1ON bit from low to high. In the PWM Mode, the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits only after the TM has been switched off. Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits are changed when the TM is running 98 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Bit 3 T1BOC: TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 Output control bit Compare Match Output Mode 0: Initial low 1: Initial high Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode 0: Active low 1: Active high This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon whether TM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of the TM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low. Bit 2 T1BPOL: TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TB1B_2 Output polarity Control 0: Non-invert 1: Invert This bit controls the polarity of the TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 output pin. When the bit is set high the TM output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. Bit 1~0 T1PWM1~T1PWM0: Select PWM Mode 00: Edge aligned 01: Centre aligned, compare match on count up 10: Centre aligned, compare match on count down 11: Centre aligned, compare match on count up or down • TM1DL Register – 10-bit ETM Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R R R R R R R R POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 TM1DL: TM1 Counter Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0 TM1 10-bit Counter bit 7~bit 0 • TM1DH Register – 10-bit ETM Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — D9 D8 R/W — — — — — — R R POR — — — — — — 0 0 2 1 0 Bit 7~2 Unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 TM1DH: TM1 Counter High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0 TM1 10-bit Counter bit 9~bit 8 • TM1AL Register – 10-bit ETM Bit 6 5 4 3 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 Rev. 1.20 7 TM1AL: TM1 Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0 TM1 10-bit CCRA bit 7~bit 0 99 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver • TM1AH Register – 10-bit ETM Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — D9 D8 R/W — — — — — — R/W R/W POR — — — — — — 0 0 Bit 7~2 Unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 TM1AH: TM1 High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0 TM1 10-bit CCRA bit 9~bit 8 • TM1BL Register – 10-bit ETM Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 ~ 0 TM1BL: TM1 Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0 TM1 10-bit CCRB bit 7~bit 0 • TM1BH Register – 10-bit ETM Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — — — D9 D8 R/W — — — — — — R/W R/W POR — — — — — — 0 0 Bit 7~2 Unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 TM1BH: TM1 High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0 TM1 10-bit CCRB bit 9 ~ bit 8 Enhanced Type TM Operating Modes The Enhanced Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode, PWM Output Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The operating mode is selected using the TnAM1 and TnAM0 bits in the TMnC1, and the TnBM1 and TnBM0 bits in the TMnC2 register. ETM Operating Mode CCRA CCRA CCRA Single CCRA Input Compare CCRA PWM Timer/Counter Pulse Output Capture Match Output Output Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode CCRB Compare Match Output Mode √ — — — — CCRB Timer/Counter Mode — √ — — — CCRB PWM Output Mode — — √ — — CCRB Single Pulse Output Mode — — — √ — CCRB Input Capture Mode — — — — — "√": permitted; "—" : not permitted Rev. 1.20 100 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Compare Output Mode To select this mode, bits TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 in the TMnC1/TMnC2 registers should be all cleared to zero. In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P. When the TnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when a compare match occurs from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows the counter to overflow. Here both the TnAF and TnPF interrupt request flags for Comparator A and Comparator P respectively, will both be generated. If the TnCCLR bit in the TMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the TnAF interrupt request flag will be generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when TnCCLR is high no TnPF interrupt request flag will be generated. TnCCLR = 0; TnAM1, TnAM0 = 00 Counter overflow Counter Value CCRP = 0 0x3FF CCRP > 0 Counter cleared by CCRP value CCRP > 0 CCRP Pause Resume Counter Reset Stop CCRA Time TnON bit TnPAU bit TnAPOL bit CCRP Int. Flag TnPF CCRA Int. Flag TnAF TPnA O/P Pin Output Pin set to Initial Level Low if TnAOC = 0 Output Toggle with TnAF flag Now TnAIO1, TnAIO0 = 10 Active High Output Select Output inverts when TnAPOL is high Output Pin Reset to initial value Output not affected by TnAF flag. Remains High until reset by TnON bit Output controlled by other pin-shared function Here TnAIO1, TnAIO0 = 11 Toggle Output Select ETM CCRA Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 0 Note: 1. With TnCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter 2. The TPnA output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag 3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge Rev. 1.20 101 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin, will change state. The TM output pin condition however only changes state when an TnAF or TnBF interrupt request flag is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A or Comparator B. The TnPF interrupt request flag, generated from a compare match from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output pin. The way in which the TM output pin changes state is determined by the condition of the TnAIO1 and TnAIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register for ETM CCRA, and the TnBIO1 and TnBIO0 bits in the TMnC2 register for ETM CCRB. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnAIO1, TnAIO0 bits (for the TPnA pin) and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits (for the TPnB_0, TPnB_1 or TPnB_2 pins) to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match occurs from Comparator A or a compare match occurs from Comparator B. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the TnON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the TnAOC or TnBOC bit for TPnA or TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 output pins. Note that if the TnAIO1,TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits are zero then no pin change will take place. TnCCLR = 0; TnBM1, TnBM0 = 00 Counter overflow Counter Value CCRP = 0 0x3FF CCRP > 0 Counter cleared by CCRP value CCRP > 0 CCRP Pause Resume Counter Reset Stop CCRB Time TnON bit TnPAU bit TnBPOL bit CCRP Int. Flag TnPF CCRB Int. Flag TnBAF TPnB O/P Pin Output Pin set to Initial Level Low if TnBOC = 0 Output Toggle with TnBF flag Now TnBIO1, TnBIO0 = 10 Active High Output Select Output inverts when TnBPOL is high Output Pin Reset to initial value Output not affected by TnBF flag. Remains High until reset by TnON bit Output controlled by other pin-shared function Here TnBIO1, TnBIO0 = 11 Toggle Output Select ETM CCRB Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 0 Note: 1. With TnCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter 2. The TPnB output pin is controlled only by the TnBF flag 3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge Rev. 1.20 102 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TnCCLR = 0; TnAM1, TnAM0 = 00 Counter overflow Counter Value CCRP = 0 0x3FF CCRP > 0 Counter cleared by CCRP value CCRP > 0 CCRP Pause Resume Counter Reset Stop CCRA Time TnON bit TnPAU bit TnAPOL bit CCRP Int. Flag TnPF CCRA Int. Flag TnAF TPnA O/P Pin Output Pin set to Initial Level Low if TnAOC = 0 Output Toggle with TnAF flag Now TnAIO1, TnAIO0 = 10 Active High Output Select Output inverts when TnAPOL is high Output Pin Reset to initial value Output not affected by TnAF flag. Remains High until reset by TnON bit Output controlled by other pin-shared function Here TnAIO1, TnAIO0 = 11 Toggle Output Select ETM CCRA Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 1 Note: 1. With TnCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter 2. The TPnA output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag 3. The TPnA output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge 4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1 Rev. 1.20 103 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TnCCLR = 0; TnBM1, TnBM0 = 00 Counter overflow Counter Value CCRP = 0 0x3FF CCRP > 0 Counter cleared by CCRP value CCRP > 0 CCRP Pause Resume Counter Reset Stop CCRB Time TnON bit TnPAU bit TnBPOL bit CCRP Int. Flag TnPF CCRB Int. Flag TnBAF TPnB O/P Pin Output Pin set to Initial Level Low if TnBOC = 0 Output Toggle with TnBF flag Now TnBIO1, TnBIO0 = 10 Active High Output Select Output inverts when TnBPOL is high Output Pin Reset to initial value Output not affected by TnBF flag. Remains High until reset by TnON bit Output controlled by other pin-shared function Here TnBIO1, TnBIO0 = 11 Toggle Output Select ETM CCRB Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 1 Note: 1. With TnCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter 2. The TPnB output pin is controlled only by the TnBF flag 3. The TPnB output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge 4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1 Rev. 1.20 104 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Timer/Counter Mode To select this mode, bits TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 in the TMnC1 and TMnC2 register should all be set high. The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode, the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function. PWM Output Mode To select this mode, the required bit pairs, TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 should be set to 10 respectively and also the TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits should be set to 10 respectively. The PWM function within the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control, heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty cycle on the TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent DC RMS values. As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the TnCCLR bit is used to determine in which way the PWM period is controlled. With the TnCCLR bit set high, the PWM period can be finely controlled using the CCRA registers. In this case the CCRB registers are used to set the PWM duty value (for TPnB output pins). The CCRP bits are not used and TPnA output pin is not used. The PWM output can only be generated on the TPnB output pins. With the TnCCLR bit cleared to zero, the PWM period is set using one of the eight values of the three CCRP bits, in multiples of 128. Now both CCRA and CCRB registers can be used to setup different duty cycle values to provide dual PWM outputs on their relative TPnA and TPnB pins. The TnPWM1 and TnPWM0 bits determine the PWM alignment type, which can be either edge or centre type. In edge alignment, the leading edge of the PWM signals will all be generated concurrently when the counter is reset to zero. With all power currents switching on at the same time, this may give rise to problems in higher power applications. In centre alignment the centre of the PWM active signals will occur sequentially, thus reducing the level of simultaneous power switching currents. Interrupt flags, one for each of the CCRA, CCRB and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match occurs from either the Comparator A, Comparator B or Comparator P. The TnAOC and TnBOC bits in the TMnC1 and TMnC2 register are used to select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits pairs are used to enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The TnAPOL and TnBPOL bit are used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform. Rev. 1.20 105 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver ETM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, TnCCLR=0 CCRP 001b 010b 011b 100b 101b 110b 111b 000b Period 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 A Duty CCRA B Duty CCRB If fSYS = 16MHz, TM clock source select fSYS/4, CCRP = 100b, CCRA = 128 and CCRB = 256, The TP1A PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4)/512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125kHz, duty = 128/512 = 25%. The TP1B_n PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4)/512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125kHz, duty = 256/512 = 50%. If the Duty value defined by CCRA or CCRB register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the PWM output duty is 100%. ETM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, TnCCLR=1 CCRA 1 2 3 511 512 1021 1022 1023 Period 1 2 3 511 512 1021 1022 1023 B Duty CCRB ETM, PWM Mode, Center-aligned Mode, TnCCLR=0 CCRP 001b 010b 011b 100b 101b 110b 111b 000b Period 256 512 768 1024 1280 1536 1792 2046 A Duty (CCRA×2)-1 B Duty (CCRB×2)-1 ETM, PWM Mode, Center-aligned Mode, TnCCLR=1 CCRA 1 2 3 511 512 1021 1022 1023 Period 2 4 6 1022 1024 2042 2044 2046 B Duty Rev. 1.20 (CCRB×2)-1 106 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Co�nter Val�e TnCCLR = 0 ; Mode Bits Tn�(B)M1� Tn�(B)M0 = 10 TnPWM1/TnPWM0 = 00 Co�nter Cleared by CCRP CCRP Pa�se Res�me Co�nter Stops if TnON bit low Co�nter reset when TnON ret�rns hi�h CCR� CCRB Time TnON bit TnP�U bit Tn�POL bit Interr�pt still �enerated CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRB Int. Fla� TnBF CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 = 10 PWM O�tp�t Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 = 00 O�tp�t Inactive Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 = 10 TPn� Pin Tn�OC = 1 O�tp�t Inverts When Tn�POL = 1 Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 = 10 Res�me PWM O�tp�t D�ty Cycle set by CCR� TPnB Pin TnBOC = 1 TPnB Pin TnBOC = 0 D�ty Cycle set by CCRB PWM Period set by CCRP Here Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 = 00 O�tp�t is Inactive PWM r�ns internally PWM res�mes operation O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction ETM PWM Mode – Edge Aligned Note: 1. Here TnCCLR=0 therefore CCRP clears counter and determines the PWM period 2. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnAIO [1:0] (or TnBIO [1:0]) = 00 or 01 3. CCRA controls the TPnA PWM duty and CCRB controls the TPnB PWM duty Rev. 1.20 107 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Co�nter Val�e TnCCLR = 1 ; Mode Bits Tn�(B)M1� Tn�(B)M0 = 10 TnPWM1/TnPWM0 = 00 Co�nter Cleared by CCR� CCR� Pa�se Res�me Co�nter reset when TnON ret�rns hi�h Co�nter Stops if TnON bit low CCRB Time TnON bit TnP�U bit TnBPOL bit CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRB Int. Fla� TnBF TPnB Pin TnBOC = 1 TPnB Pin TnBOC = 0 D�ty Cycle set by CCRB PWM res�mes operation O�tp�t Inverts When TnBPOL = 1 O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction PWM Period set by CCR� ETM PWM Mode – Edge Aligned Note: 1. Here TnCCLR=1 therefore CCRA clears the counter and determines the PWM period 2. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnBIO [1:0] = 00 or 01 3. The CCRA controls the TPnB PWM period and CCRB controls the TPnB PWM duty 4. Here the TM pin control register should not enable the TPnA pin as a TM output pin. Rev. 1.20 108 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TnCCLR = 0; Mode Bits Tn�(B)M1� Tn�(B)M0 = 10 TnPWM1/TnPWM0 = 11 Co�nter Val�e CCRP Pa�se Res�me Co�nter Stops if TnON bit low Co�nter reset when TnON ret�rns hi�h CCR� CCRB Time TnON bit TnP�U bit Tn�POL bit CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRB Int. Fla� TnBF CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 = 10 PWM O�tp�t Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 = 10 PWM O�tp�t TPn� Pin Tn�OC = 1 D�ty Cycle set by CCR� O�tp�t Inverts When Tn�POL = 1 Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 = 00 O�tp�t Inactive TPnB Pin TnBOC = 1 TPnB Pin TnBOC = 0 D�ty Cycle set by CCRB PWM res�mes operation O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction PWM Period set by CCRP ETM PWM Mode – Centre Aligned Note: 1. Here TnCCLR=0 therefore CCRP clears the counter and determines the PWM period 2. TnPWM [1:0] =11 therefore the PWM is centre aligned 3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnAIO [1:0] (or TnBIO [1:0]) = 00 or 01 4. CCRA controls the TPnA PWM duty and CCRB controls the TPnB PWM duty 5. CCRP will generate an interrupt request when the counter decrements to its zero value Rev. 1.20 109 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TnCCLR = 1; Mode Bits Tn�(B)M1� Tn�(B)M0 = 10 TnPWM1/TnPWM0 = 11 Co�nter Val�e CCR� Pa�se Res�me Co�nter Stops if TnON bit low Co�nter reset when TnON ret�rns hi�h CCRB Time TnON bit TnP�U bit TnBPOL bit CCRB Int. Fla� TnBF CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F TPnB Pin TnBOC = 1 TPnB Pin TnBOC = 0 D�ty Cycle set by CCRB PWM res�mes O�tp�t Inverts operation When TnBPOL = 1 PWM Period set by CCR� O�tp�t controlled by other pin-shared f�nction ETM PWM Mode – Centre Aligned Note: 1. Here TnCCLR=1 therefore CCRA clears the counter and determines the PWM period. 2. TnPWM [1:0] =11 therefore the PWM is centre aligned. 3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnBIO [1:0] = 00 or 01. 4. CCRA controls the TPnB PWM period and CCRB controls the TPnB PWM duty. 5. CCRP will generate an interrupt request when the counter decrements to its zero value. Rev. 1.20 110 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Single Pulse Output Mode To select this mode, the required bit pairs, TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 should be set to 10 respectively and also the corresponding TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits should be set to 11 respectively. The Single Pulse Output Mode, as the name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse on the TM output pin. The trigger for the pulse TPnA output leading edge is a low to high transition of the TnON bit, which can be implemented using the application program. The trigger for the pulse TPnB output leading edge is a compare match from Comparator B, which can be implemented using the application program. However in the Single Pulse Mode, the TnON bit can also be made to automatically change from low to high using the external TCKn pin, which will in turn initiate the Single Pulse output of TPnA. When the TnON bit transitions to a high level, the counter will start running and the pulse leading edge of TPnA will be generated. The TnON bit should remain high when the pulse is in its active state. The generated pulse trailing edge of TPnA and TPnB will be generated when the TnON bit is cleared to zero, which can be implemented using the application program or when a compare match occurs from Comparator A. However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the TnON bit and thus generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge of TPnA and TPnB. In this way the CCRA value can be used to control the pulse width of TPnA. The CCRA-CCRB value can be used to control the pulse width of TPnB. A compare match from Comparator A and Comparator B will also generate TM interrupts. The counter can only be reset back to zero when the TnON bit changes from low to high when the counter restarts. In the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The TnCCLR bit is also not used. Single Pulse Generation Rev. 1.20 111 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Co�nter Val�e Tn�M1� Tn�M0 and TnBM1� TnBM0 = 10; Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 and TnBIO1� TnBIO0 = 11 Co�nter Stopped by CCR� CCR� Pa�se Res�me Co�nter Stops by software Co�nter reset when TnON ret�rns hi�h CCRB Time TnON bit ��to. set by TCKn pin TCKn pin Software Tri��er Cleared by CCR� match Software Clear Software Tri��er Software Tri��er TCKn pin Tri��er TnP�U bit Tn�POL� TnBPOL bit CCRB Int. Fla� TnBF CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 and TnBIO1� TnBIO0 = 11 Sin�le P�lse O�tp�t Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 and TnBIO1� TnBIO0 = 00 O�tp�t Inactive Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 and TnBIO1� TnBIO0 = 11 TPn� Pin Tn�OC = 1 TPn� Pin Tn�OC = 0 P�lse Width set by CCR� TPnB Pin TnBOC = 1 Here Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 and TnBIO1� TnBIO0 = 00 O�tp�t Forced to Inactive level b�t co�nter keeps r�nnin� internally Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 and TnBIO1� TnBIO0 = 11 Res�me Sin�le P�lse O�tp�t O�tp�t Inverts When Tn�POL = 1 P�lse Width set by CCR� - CCRB TPnB Pin TnBOC = 0 O�tp�t Inverts When TnBPOL = 1 ETM – Single Pulse Mode Note: 1. Counter stopped by CCRA 2. CCRP is not used 3. The pulse is triggered by the TCKn pin or by setting the TnON bit high 4. A TCKn pin active edge will automatically set the TnON bit high 5. In the Single Pulse Mode, TnAIO [1:0] and TnBIO [1:0] must be set to "11" and can not be changed. Rev. 1.20 112 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Capture Input Mode To select this mode bits TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 in the TMnC1 and TMnC2 registers should be set to 01 respectively. This mode enables external signals to capture and store the present value of the internal counter and can therefore be used for applications such as pulse width measurements. The external signal is supplied on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins, whose active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or both rising and falling edges; the active edge transition type is selected using the TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits in the TMnC1 and TMnC2 registers. The counter is started when the TnON bit changes from low to high which is initiated using the application program. When the required edge transition appears on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins the present value in the counter will be latched into the CCRA and CCRB registers and a TM interrupt generated. Irrespective of what events occur on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins the counter will continue to free run until the TnON bit changes from high to low. When a CCRP compare match occurs the counter will reset back to zero; in this way the CCRP value can be used to control the maximum counter value. When a CCRP compare match occurs from Comparator P, a TM interrupt will also be generated. Counting the number of overflow interrupt signals from the CCRP can be a useful method in measuring long pulse widths. The TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits can select the active trigger edge on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins to be a rising edge, falling edge or both edge types. If the TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits are both set high, then no capture operation will take place irrespective of what happens on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins, however it must be noted that the counter will continue to run. Tn�M1� Tn�M0 = 01 Co�nter Val�e Co�nter overflow CCRP Stop Co�nter Reset YY Pa�se Res�me XX Time TnON bit TnP�U bit TM Capt�re Pin �ctive ed�e �ctive ed�e �ctive ed�es CCR� Int. Fla� Tn�F CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF CCR� Val�e Tn�IO1� Tn�IO0 Val�e XX 00 - Risin� ed�e YY 01 - Fallin� ed�e XX YY 10 - Both ed�es 11 - Disable Capt�re ETM CCRA Capture Input Mode Note: 1. TnAM [1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnAIO [1:0] bits 2. The TM Capture input pin active edge transfers he counter value to CCRA 3. TnCCLR bit not used 4. No output function -- TnAOC and TnAPOL bits not used 5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP is equal to zero. Rev. 1.20 113 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver As the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins are pin shared with other functions, care must be taken if the TM is in the Capture Input Mode. This is because if the pin is setup as an output, then any transitions on this pin may cause an input capture operation to be executed. The TnCCLR, TnAOC, TnBOC, TnAPOL and TnBPOL bits are not used in this mode. TnBM1� TnBM0 = 01 Co�nter Val�e Co�nter overflow CCRP Stop Co�nter Reset YY Pa�se Res�me XX Time TnON bit TnP�U bit TM Capt�re Pin �ctive ed�e �ctive ed�e �ctive ed�es CCRB Int. Fla� TnBF CCRP Int. Fla� TnPF CCRB Val�e TnBIO1� TnBIO0 Val�e XX 00 - Risin� ed�e YY 01 - Fallin� ed�e XX YY 10 - Both ed�es 11 - Disable Capt�re ETM CCRB Capture Input Mode Note: 1. TnBM [1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnBIO [1:0] bits 2. The TM Capture input pin active edge transfers the counter value to CCRB 3. TnCCLR bit not used 4. No output function -- TnBOC and TnBPOL bits not used 5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP is equal to zero. Rev. 1.20 114 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Touch Key Function Each device provides multiple touch key functions. The touch key function is fully integrated and requires no external components, allowing touch key functions to be implemented by the simple manipulation of internal registers. Touch Key Structure The touch keys are pin shared with the PC and PD logic I/O pins, as well as having dedicated pins. For the pin shared touch keys, the touch key function is chosen using register bits. Keys are organised into groups of four, with each group known as a module and having a module number, M0 to M4. Each module contains its own control logic circuits and register set. Examination of the register names will reveal the module number it is referring to. Device Keys - n BS85B12-3 12 BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 Touch Key Module Touch Key Shared I/O Pin M0 K1~K4 PC0~PC3 M1 K5~K8 PC4~PC7 M2 K9~K12 Dedicated Pins M0 K1~K4 PC0~PC3 M1 K5~K8 PC4~PC7 20 M2 K9~K12 Dedicated Pins M3 K13~K16 PD0~PD3 M4 K17~K20 PD4~PD7 Touch Key Module/Pin Reference Table Touch Key Register Definition Each touch key module, which contains four touch key functions, has its own suite of registers. The following table shows the register set for each touch key module. The Mn within the register name refers to the Touch Key module number and has a range of M0 to M4. Name Usage TKMn16DH 16-bit C/F counter high byte TKMn16DL 16-bit C/F counter low byte TKMnC0 Control Register 0 Key Select TKMnC1 Control Register 1 Internal reference. Touch pad reference. TKMnC2 Control Register 2 Counter on-off and clear control/reference clock control/TKST start bit TKMnC3 Control Register 3 Counter overflow bits Register Listing Rev. 1.20 115 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Register Name Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TKMn16DH D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TKMn16DL D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TKMnC0 MnMXS1 MnMXS0 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 MnK4IO MnK3IO MnK2IO MnK1IO D1 MnROS TKMnC1 MnK4OEN MnK3OEN MnK2OEN MnK1OEN TKMnC2 Mn16CTON D6 MnST MnROEN TKMnC3 D9 D8 MnRCOV Mn16CTOV MnRCCLR Mn16CTCLR D3 MnROVS2 MnROVS1 MnROVS0 Register Content Summary TKMn16DH Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R R R R R R R R POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 Module n 16-bit counter high byte contents TKMn16DL Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R R R R R R R R POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 Module n 16-bit counter low byte contents TKMnC0 Register Bit Name 7 6 MnMXS1 MnMXS0 5 4 3 2 1 0 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 7~6 MnMXS1, MnMXS0: Multiplexer Key Select Bit Bit 5~0 Rev. 1.20 Module Number MnMXS1 MnMXS0 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 0 0 Key 1 Key 5 Key 9 Key 13 Key 17 0 1 Key 2 Key 6 Key 10 Key 14 Key 18 1 0 Key 3 Key 7 Key 11 Key 15 Key 19 1 1 Key 4 Key 8 Key 12 Key 16 Key 20 D5~D0: These bits must be set to the binary value "011000" 116 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TKMnC1 Register Bit Name 7 6 5 4 3 MnK4OEN MnK3OEN MnK2OEN MnK1OEN MnK4IO 2 1 0 MnK3IO MnK2IO MnK1IO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 For the BS85B12-3 n=0~2 while for the BS85C20-3 n=0~4. Bits 7~4 MnK4OEN~ MnK1OEN: key selector control MnK4OEN Key 4 Key 8 M2 M3 M4 Key 12 Key 16 Key 20 Disable 1 Enable M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 Key 3 Key 7 Key 11 Key 15 Key 19 0 Disable 1 Enable MnK2OEN M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 Key 2 Key 6 Key 10 Key 14 Key 18 0 Disable 1 Enable MnK1OEN M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 Key 1 Key 5 Key 9 Key 13 Key 17 0 Disable 1 Enable I/O Pin or Touch Key Function Select MnK4IO M0 M1 PC3/Key 4 PC7/Key 8 M3 I/O pin 1 Touch Key M0 M1 PC2/Key 3 PC6/Key 7 M3 I/O pin 1 Touch Key M0 M1 PC1/Key 2 PC5/Key 6 M3 I/O pin 1 Touch Key M0 M1 PC0/Key 1 PC4/Key 5 M3 M4 PD0/Key 13 PD4/Key 17 0 I/O pin 1 Touch Key 117 M4 PD1/Key 14 PD5/Key 18 0 MnK1IO M4 PD2/Key 15 PD6/Key 19 0 MnK2IO M4 PD3/Key 16 PD7/Key 20 0 MnK3IO Rev. 1.20 M1 0 MnK3OEN Bits 3~0 M0 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TKMnC2 Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Mn16CTON D6 MnST MnROEN MnRCCLR Mn16CTCLR D1 MnROS R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Mn16CTON: 16-bit C/F counter control 0: disable 1: enable D6: This bit must be cleared to zero. MnST: Time slot counter start control 0: time slot counter stopped 0 → 1: enable time slot counter. When this bit changes from low to high the time slot counter will be enabled and the touch sense procedure started. When the time slot counter has completed its counting an interrupt will be generated. MnROEN: Reference clock control 0: disable 1: enable MnRCCLR: Time slot counter clear control 0: no change 1: clear counter This bit must be first set to 1 and then to 0. Mn16CTCLR: 16-bit C/F counter clear control 0: no change 1: clear counter This bit must be first set to 1 and then to 0. D1: This bit must be cleared to zero. MnROS: Time slot counter clock source 0: reference clock 1: sense key oscillator M0:K4, M1:K8, M2:K12, M3:K16, M4:K20 TKMnC3 Register Bit 7 6 Name D7 D6 R/W R R R POR 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2~0 Rev. 1.20 5 4 3 2 1 0 D3 MnROVS2 MnROVS1 MnROVS0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 MnRCOV Mn16CTOV D7, D6: Read only bits -- unknown values MnRCOV: Time slot counter overflow flag 0: no overflow 1: overflow Mn16CTOV: 16-bit C/F counter overflow flag 0: no overflow 1: overflow D3: This bit must be cleared to zero. MnROVS2~MnROVS0: Time slot counter overflow time setup 000: 64 count 001: 128 count 010: 256 count 011: 512 count 100: 1024 count 101: 2048 count 110: 4096 count 111: 8192 count 118 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Touch Key Operation When a finger touches or is in proximity to a touch pad, the capacitance of the pad will increase. By using this capacitance variation to change slightly the frequency of the internal sense oscillator, touch actions can be sensed by measuring these frequency changes. Using an internal programmable divider the reference clock is used to generated a fixed time period. By counting the number of generated clock cycles from the sense oscillator during this fixed time period touch key actions can be determined. Each touch key module contains four touch key inputs which are either dedicated touch key pins or are shared logical I/O pins. If shared, the desired function is selected using register bits. Each touch key has its own independent sense oscillator. There are therefore four sense oscillators within each touch key module. Each Touch Key module also has its own interrupt vector and set of interrupts flags. During this reference clock fixed interval, the number of clock cycles generated by the sense oscillator is measured, and it is this value that is used to determine if a touch action has been made or not. At the end of the fixed reference clock time interval, a Touch Key interrupt signal will be generated. Touch Key (1 set = Touch Key*5) Key 0 Key 1 C/F Key 2 & Mux. 16-bit C/F Counter 16-bit C/F Counter INT Flag 16-bit C/F Counter Overflow Flag Enable Key 3 M U X Reference Clock Time Slot Counter Time Slot Counter INT flag Time Slot Counter Overflow flag Time Slot Counter Clock Select Touch Switch Module Block Diagram M n K 4 IO I/O E x te r n a l P in o r T o u c h K e y T o u c h C ir c u its L o g ic I/O c ir c u its M n K 3 IO I/O T o u c h C ir c u its L o g ic I/O c ir c u its b it E x te r n a l P in o r T o u c h K e y T o u c h C ir c u its L o g ic I/O c ir c u its M n K 1 IO I/O b it E x te r n a l P in o r T o u c h K e y M n K 2 IO I/O b it E x te r n a l P in o r T o u c h K e y b it T o u c h C ir c u its L o g ic I/O c ir c u its Touch Key or I/O Function Select Rev. 1.20 119 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Touch Key Interrupt Each touch key module, which consists of four touch keys, has two independent interrupts, one for each of the, 16-bit C/F counter and time slot counter. The time slot counter interrupt has its own interrupt vector while the 16-bit C/F counter interrupts are contained within the Multi-function interrupts and therefore do not have their own vector. Care must be taken during programming as the 16-bit C/F counter interrupt flags contained within the Multi-function interrupts will not be automatically reset upon entry into the interrupt service routine but rather must be reset manually by the application program. More details regarding the touch key interrupts are located in the interrupt section of the datasheet. Programming Considerations After the relevant registers are setup, the touch key detection process is initiated the changing the MnST bit from low to high. This will enable and synchronise all relevant oscillators. The MnRCOV flag, which is the time slot counter flag will go high and remain high until the counter overflows. When this happens an interrupt signal will be generated. When the external touch key size and layout are defined, their related capacitances will then determine the sensor oscillator frequency. Rev. 1.20 120 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Serial Interface Module – SIM These devices contain a Serial Interface Module, which includes both the four line SPI interface or the two line I2C interface types, to allow an easy method of communication with external peripheral hardware. Having relatively simple communication protocols, these serial interface types allow the microcontroller to interface to external SPI or I2C based hardware such as sensors, Flash or EEPROM memory, etc. The SIM pins are pin shared with other I/O pins and must be selected using the SIMEN bit in the SIMC0 register. As both interface types share the same pins and registers, the choice of whether the SPI or I2C type is used is made using the SIM operating mode control bits, named SIM2~SIM0, in the SIMC0 register. SPI Interface The SPI interface is often used to communicate with external peripheral devices such as sensors, Flash or EEPROM memory devices etc. Originally developed by Motorola, the four line SPI interface is a synchronous serial data interface that has a relatively simple communication protocol simplifying the programming requirements when communicating with external hardware devices. The communication is full duplex and operates as a slave/master type, where the device can be either master or slave. Although the SPI interface specification can control multiple slave devices from a single master, but this device provided only one SCS pin. If the master needs to control multiple slave devices from a single master, the master can use I/O pin to select the slave devices. SPI Interface Operation The SPI interface is a full duplex synchronous serial data link. It is a four line interface with pin names SDI, SDO, SCK and SCS. Pins SDI and SDO are the Serial Data Input and Serial Data Output lines, SCK is the Serial Clock line and SCS is the Slave Select line. As the SPI interface pins are pin-shared with normal I/O pins and with the I2C function pins, the SPI interface must first be enabled by setting the correct bits in the SIMC0 and SIMC2 registers. Communication between devices connected to the SPI interface is carried out in a slave/master mode with all data transfer initiations being implemented by the master. The Master also controls the clock signal. As the device only contains a single SCS pin only one slave device can be utilized. The SCS pin is controlled by software, set CSEN bit to "1" to enable SCS pin function, set CSEN bit to "0" the SCS pin will be as I/O function. SPI Master/Slave Connection The SPI function in this device offers the following features: • Full duplex synchronous data transfer • Both Master and Slave modes • LSB first or MSB first data transmission modes • Transmission complete flag • Rising or falling active clock edge The status of the SPI interface pins is determined by a number of factors such as whether the device is in the master or slave mode and upon the condition of certain control bits such as CSEN and SIMEN. Rev. 1.20 121 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SPI Block Diagram SPI Registers There are three internal registers which control the overall operation of the SPI interface. These are the SIMD data register and two registers SIMC0 and SIMC2. Note that the SIMC1 register is only used by the I2C interface. Bit Register Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SIMC0 SIM2 SIM1 SIM0 PCKEN PCKP1 PCKP0 SIMEN — SIMD D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 SIMC2 D7 D6 CKPOLB CKEG MLS CSEN WCOL TRF SPI Register List The SIMD register is used to store the data being transmitted and received. The same register is used by both the SPI and I2C functions. Before the device writes data to the SPI bus, the actual data to be transmitted must be placed in the SIMD register. After the data is received from the SPI bus, the device can read it from the SIMD register. Any transmission or reception of data from the SPI bus must be made via the SIMD register. SIMD Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR x x x x x x x x ”x“ unknown There are also two control registers for the SPI interface, SIMC0 and SIMC2. Note that the SIMC2 register also has the name SIMA which is used by the I2C function. The SIMC1 register is not used by the SPI function, only by the I2C function. Register SIMC0 is used to control the enable/disable function and to set the data transmission clock frequency. Although not connected with the SPI function, the SIMC0 register is also used to control the Peripheral Clock Prescaler. Register SIMC2 is used for other control functions such as LSB/MSB selection, write collision flag etc. Rev. 1.20 122 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SIMC0 Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SIM2 SIM1 SIM0 PCKEN PCKP1 PCKP0 SIMEN — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — POR 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 — Bit 7~5 SIM2, SIM1, SIM0: SIM Operating Mode Control 000: SPI master mode; SPI clock is fSYS/4 001: SPI master mode; SPI clock is fSYS/16 010: SPI master mode; SPI clock is fSYS/64 011: SPI master mode; SPI clock is fLIRC 100: Unused 101: SPI slave mode 110: I2C slave mode 111: Unused These bits setup the overall operating mode of the SIM function. As well as selecting if the I2C or SPI function, they are used to control the SPI Master/Slave selection and the SPI Master clock frequency. The SPI clock is a function of the system clock but can also be chosen to be sourced from the TM0. If the SPI Slave Mode is selected then the clock will be supplied by an external Master device. Bit 4 PCKEN: PCK Output Pin Control 0: Disable 1: Enable Bit 3~2 PCKP1, PCKP0: Select PCK output pin frequency 00: fSYS 01: fSYS/4 10: fSYS/8 11: TM0 CCRP match frequency/2 Bit 1 SIMEN: SIM Control 0: disable 1: enable The bit is the overall on/off control for the SIM interface. When the SIMEN bit is cleared, the SDI, SDO, SCK and SCS, or SDA and SCL lines will be as I/O function and the SIM operating current will be reduced to a minimum value. When the bit is high the SIM interface is enabled. If the SIM is configured to operate as an SPI interface via the SIM2~SIM0 bits, the contents of the SPI control registers will remain at the previous settings when the SIMEN bit changes from low to high and should therefore be first initialised by the application program. If the SIM is configured to operate as an I2C interface via the SIM2~SIM0 bits and the SIMEN bit changes from low to high, the contents of the I2C control bits such as HTX and TXAK will remain at the previous settings and should therefore be first initialised by the application program while the relevant I2C flags such as HCF, HAAS, HBB, SRW and RXAK will be set to their default states. Bit 0 unimplemented, read as "0" 123 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SIMC2 Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 CKPOLB CKEG MLS CSEN WCOL TRF R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 Undefined bit This bit can be read or written by user software program. Bit 5 CKPOLB: Determines the base condition of the clock line 0: the SCK line will be high when the clock is inactive 1: the SCK line will be low when the clock is inactive The CKPOLB bit determines the base condition of the clock line, if the bit is high, then the SCK line will be low when the clock is inactive. When the CKPOLB bit is low, then the SCK line will be high when the clock is inactive. Bit 4 CKEG: Determines SPI SCK active clock edge type CKPOLB=0 0: SCK is high base level and data capture at SCK rising edge 1: SCK is high base level and data capture at SCK falling edge CKPOLB=1 0: SCK is low base level and data capture at SCK falling edge 1: SCK is low base level and data capture at SCK rising edge The CKEG and CKPOLB bits are used to setup the way that the clock signal outputs and inputs data on the SPI bus. These two bits must be configured before data transfer is executed otherwise an erroneous clock edge may be generated. The CKPOLB bit determines the base condition of the clock line, if the bit is high, then the SCK line will be low when the clock is inactive. When the CKPOLB bit is low, then the SCK line will be high when the clock is inactive. The CKEG bit determines active clock edge type which depends upon the condition of CKPOLB bit. Rev. 1.20 Bit 3 MLS: SPI Data shift order 0: LSB 1: MSB This is the data shift select bit and is used to select how the data is transferred, either MSB or LSB first. Setting the bit high will select MSB first and low for LSB first. Bit 2 CSEN: SPI SCS pin Control 0: Disable 1: Enable The CSEN bit is used as an enable/disable for the SCS pin. If this bit is low, then the SCS pin will be disabled and as I/O function. If the bit is high the SCS pin will be enabled and used as a select pin. Bit 1 WCOL: SPI Write Collision flag 0: No collision 1: Collision The WCOL flag is used to detect if a data collision has occurred. If this bit is high it means that data has been attempted to be written to the SIMD register during a data transfer operation. This writing operation will be ignored if data is being transferred. The bit can be cleared by the application program. Bit 0 TRF: SPI Transmit/Receive Complete flag 0: Data is being transferred 1: SPI data transmission is completed The TRF bit is the Transmit/Receive Complete flag and is set "1" automatically when an SPI data transmission is completed, but must set to "0" by the application program. It can be used to generate an interrupt. 124 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SPI Communication After the SPI interface is enabled by setting the SIMEN bit high, then in the Master Mode, when data is written to the SIMD register, transmission/reception will begin simultaneously. When the data transfer is complete, the TRF flag will be set automatically, but must be cleared using the application program. In the Slave Mode, when the clock signal from the master has been received, any data in the SIMD register will be transmitted and any data on the SDI pin will be shifted into the SIMD register. The master should output an SCS signal to enable the slave device before a clock signal is provided. The slave data to be transferred should be well prepared at the appropriate moment relative to the SCS signal depending upon the configurations of the CKPOLB bit and CKEG bit. The accompanying timing diagram shows the relationship between the slave data and SCS signal for various configurations of the CKPOLB and CKEG bits. The SPI will continue to function even in the IDLE Mode. SPI Master Mode Timing SPI Slave Mode Timing CKEG=0 Rev. 1.20 125 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SPI Slave Mode Timing CKEG=1 SPI Transfer Control Flowchart Rev. 1.20 126 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver I2C Interface The I 2C interface is used to communicate with external peripheral devices such as sensors, EEPROM memory etc. Originally developed by Philips, it is a two line low speed serial interface for synchronous serial data transfer. The advantage of only two lines for communication, relatively simple communication protocol and the ability to accommodate multiple devices on the same bus has made it an extremely popular interface type for many applications. I2C Master Slave Bus Connection I2C Interface Operation The I2C serial interface is a two line interface, a serial data line, SDA, and serial clock line, SCL. As many devices may be connected together on the same bus, their outputs are both open drain types. For this reason it is necessary that external pull-high resistors are connected to these outputs. Note that no chip select line exists, as each device on the I2C bus is identified by a unique address which will be transmitted and received on the I2C bus. When two devices communicate with each other on the bidirectional I2C bus, one is known as the master device and one as the slave device. Both master and slave can transmit and receive data, however, it is the master device that has overall control of the bus. For these devices, which only operates in slave mode, there are two methods of transferring data on the I2C bus, the slave transmit mode and the slave receive mode. I2C Block Diagram Rev. 1.20 127 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver The debounce time of the I2C interface uses the system clock to in effect add a debounce time to the external clock to reduce the possibility of glitches on the clock line causing erroneous operation. The debounce time, is 2 system clocks. To achieve the required I2C data transfer speed, there exists a relationship between the system clock, fSYS, and the I2C debounce time. For either the I2C Standard or Fast mode operation, users must take care of the selected system clock frequency and the configured debounce time to match the criterion shown in the following table. I2C Debounce Time Selection I2C Standard Mode (100kHz) I2C Fast Mode (400kHz) fSYS > 4MHz fSYS > 10MHz 2 system clock debounce I2C Minimum fSYS Frequency S T A R T s ig n a l fro m M a s te r S e n d s la v e a d d r e s s a n d R /W b it fr o m M a s te r A c k n o w le d g e fr o m s la v e S e n d d a ta b y te fro m M a s te r A c k n o w le d g e fr o m s la v e S T O P s ig n a l fro m M a s te r I2C Registers There are four control registers associated with the I2C bus, SIMC0, SIMC1, SIMA and I2CTOC and one data register, SIMD. The SIMD register, which is shown in the above SPI section, is used to store the data being transmitted and received on the I2C bus. Before the microcontroller writes data to the I2C bus, the actual data to be transmitted must be placed in the SIMD register. After the data is received from the I2C bus, the microcontroller can read it from the SIMD register. Any transmission or reception of data from the I2C bus must be made via the SIMD register. The SIM pins are pin shared with other I/O pins and must be selected using the SIMEN bit in the SIMC0 register. Note that the SIMA register also has the name SIMC2 which is used by the SPI function. Bit SIMEN and bits SIM2~SIM0 in register SIMC0 are used by the I2C interface. Bit Register Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SIMC0 SIM2 SIM1 SIM0 PCKEN PCKP1 PCKP0 SIMEN — SIMC1 HCF HAAS HBB HTX TXAK SRW IAMWU RXAK SIMD D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 SIMA IICA6 IICA5 IICA4 IICA3 IICA2 IICA1 IICA0 D0 I2CTOC I2CTOEN I2CTOF I2CTOS5 I2CTOS4 I2CTOS3 I2CTOS2 I2CTOS1 I2CTOS0 I2C Register List Rev. 1.20 128 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SIMC0 Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SIM2 SIM1 SIM0 PCKEN PCKP1 PCKP0 SIMEN — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — POR 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 — Bit 7~5 SIM2, SIM1, SIM0: SIM Operating Mode Control 000: SPI master mode; SPI clock is fSYS/4 001: SPI master mode; SPI clock is fSYS/16 010: SPI master mode; SPI clock is fSYS/64 011: SPI master mode; SPI clock is fLIRC 100: SPI master mode; SPI clock is TM0 CCRP match frequency/2 101: SPI slave mode 110: I2C slave mode 111: Unused mode These bits setup the overall operating mode of the SIM function. As well as selecting if the I2C or SPI function, they are used to control the SPI Master/Slave selection and the SPI Master clock frequency. The SPI clock is a function of the system clock but can also be chosen to be sourced from the TM0. If the SPI Slave Mode is selected then the clock will be supplied by an external Master device. Bit 4 PCKEN: PCK Output Pin Control Described elsewhere Bit 3~2 PCKP1, PCKP0: Select PCK output pin frequency Described elsewhere Bit 1 SIMEN: SIM Control 0: disable 1: enable The bit is the overall on/off control for the SIM interface. When the SIMEN bit is cleared, the SDI, SDO, SCK and SCS, or SDA and SCL lines will be as I/O function and the SIM operating current will be reduced to a minimum value. When the bit is high the SIM interface is enabled. If the SIM is configured to operate as an SPI interface via the SIM2~SIM0 bits, the contents of the SPI control registers will remain at the previous settings when the SIMEN bit changes from low to high and should therefore be first initialised by the application program. If the SIM is configured to operate as an I2C interface via the SIM2~SIM0 bits and the SIMEN bit changes from low to high, the contents of the I2C control bits such as HTX and TXAK will remain at the previous settings and should therefore be first initialised by the application program while the relevant I2C flags such as HCF, HAAS, HBB, SRW and RXAK will be set to their default states. Bit 0 unimplemented, read as "0" 129 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SIMC1 Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name HCF HAAS HBB HTX TXAK SRW IAMWU RXAK R/W R R R R/W R/W R R/W R POR 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 7 HCF: I2C Bus data transfer completion flag 0: Data is being transferred 1: Completion of an 8-bit data transfer The HCF flag is the data transfer flag. This flag will be zero when data is being transferred. Upon completion of an 8-bit data transfer the flag will go high and an interrupt will be generated. Bit 6 HAAS: I2C Bus address match flag 0: Not address match 1: Address match The HASS flag is the address match flag. This flag is used to determine if the slave device address is the same as the master transmit address. If the addresses match then this bit will be high, if there is no match then the flag will be low. Bit 5 HBB: I2C Bus busy flag 0: I2C Bus is not busy 1: I2C Bus is busy The HBB flag is the I2C busy flag. This flag will be "1" when the I2C bus is busy which will occur when a START signal is detected. The flag will be set to "0" when the bus is free which will occur when a STOP signal is detected. Bit 4 HTX: Select I2C slave device is transmitter or receiver 0: Slave device is the receiver 1: Slave device is the transmitter Bit 3 TXAK: I2C Bus transmit acknowledge flag 0: Slave send acknowledge flag 1: Slave do not send acknowledge flag The TXAK bit is the transmit acknowledge flag. After the slave device receipt of 8-bits of data, this bit will be transmitted to the bus on the 9th clock from the slave device. The slave device must always set TXAK bit to "0" before further data is received. Bit 2 SRW: I2C Slave Read/Write flag 0: Slave device should be in receive mode 1: Slave device should be in transmit mode The SRW flag is the I 2C Slave Read/Write flag. This flag determines whether the master device wishes to transmit or receive data from the I2C bus. When the transmitted address and slave address is match, that is when the HAAS flag is set high, the slave device will check the SRW flag to determine whether it should be in transmit mode or receive mode. If the SRW flag is high, the master is requesting to read data from the bus, so the slave device should be in transmit mode. When the SRW flag is zero, the master will write data to the bus, therefore the slave device should be in receive mode to read this data. Bit 1 IAMWU: I2C address match wake-up control 0: disable 1: enable This bit should be set to "1" to enable I2C address match wake-up from SLEEP or IDLE Mode. If the IAMWU bit has been set before entering either the SLEEP or IDLE mode to enable the I2C baddress match wake up, then this bit must be cleared by the application program after wake-up to ensure correction device operation. Bit 0 RXAK: I2C Bus Receive acknowledge flag 0: Slave receive acknowledge flag 1: Slave do not receive acknowledge flag 130 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver The RXAK flag is the receiver acknowledge flag. When the RXAK flag is "0", it means that a acknowledge signal has been received at the 9th clock, after 8 bits of data have been transmitted. When the slave device in the transmit mode, the slave device checks the RXAK flag to determine if the master receiver wishes to receive the next byte. The slave transmitter will therefore continue sending out data until the RXAK flag is "1". When this occurs, the slave transmitter will release the SDA line to allow the master to send a STOP signal to release the I2C Bus. I2CTOC Register Bit 7 6 Name I2CTOEN I2CTOF 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I2CTOS5 I2CTOS4 I2CTOS3 I2CTOS2 I2CTOS1 I2CTOS0 Bit 7 I2CTOEN: I2C Time-out Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 6 I2CTOF: Time-out flag 0: no time-out 1: time-out occurred Bit 5~0 I2CTOS5~I2CTOS0: Time-Out Time Definition I2C time-out clock source is fLIRC/32. I2C Time-Out time is given by: [I2CTOS5 : I2CTOS0]+1) x (32/fLIRC) The SIMD register is used to store the data being transmitted and received. The same register is used by both the SPI and I2C functions. Before the device writes data to the I2C bus, the actual data to be transmitted must be placed in the SIMD register. After the data is received from the I2C bus, the device can read it from the SIMD register. Any transmission or reception of data from the I2C bus must be made via the SIMD register. SIMD Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR x x x x x x x x ”x“ unknown SIMA Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name IICA6 IICA5 IICA4 IICA3 IICA2 IICA1 IICA0 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR x x x x x x x x ”x“ unknown Rev. 1.20 Bit 7~1 IICA6~ IICA0: I2C slave address IICA6~ IICA0 is the I2C slave address bit 6~bit 0. The SIMA register is also used by the SPI interface but has the name SIMC2. The SIMA register is the location where the 7-bit slave address of the slave device is stored. Bits 7~1 of the SIMA register define the device slave address. Bit 0 is not defined. When a master device, which is connected to the I2C bus, sends out an address, which matches the slave address in the SIMA register, the slave device will be selected. Note that the SIMA register is the same register address as SIMC2 which is used by the SPI interface. Bit 0 Undefined bit This bit can be read or written by user software program. 131 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver I2C Bus Communication Communication on the I2C bus requires four separate steps, a START signal, a slave device address transmission, a data transmission and finally a STOP signal. When a START signal is placed on the I2C bus, all devices on the bus will receive this signal and be notified of the imminent arrival of data on the bus. The first seven bits of the data will be the slave address with the first bit being the MSB. If the address of the slave device matches that of the transmitted address, the HAAS bit in the SIMC1 register will be set and an I2C interrupt will be generated. After entering the interrupt service routine, the slave device must first check the condition of the HAAS bit to determine whether the interrupt source originates from an address match or from the completion of an 8-bit data transfer. During a data transfer, note that after the 7-bit slave address has been transmitted, the following bit, which is the 8th bit, is the read/write bit whose value will be placed in the SRW bit. This bit will be checked by the slave device to determine whether to go into transmit or receive mode. Before any transfer of data to or from the I2C bus, the microcontroller must initialise the bus, the following are steps to achieve this: Step 1 Set the SIM2~SIM0 and SIMEN bits in the SIMC0 register to "1" to enable the I2C bus. Step 2 Write the slave address of the device to the I2C bus address register SIMA. Step 3 Set the SIME and SIM Muti-Function interrupt enable bit of the interrupt control register to enable the SIM interrupt and Multi-function interrupt. I2C Bus Initialisation Flow Chart I2C Bus Start Signal The START signal can only be generated by the master device connected to the I2C bus and not by the slave device. This START signal will be detected by all devices connected to the I2C bus. When detected, this indicates that the I2C bus is busy and therefore the HBB bit will be set. A START condition occurs when a high to low transition on the SDA line takes place when the SCL line remains high. Rev. 1.20 132 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Note: * When a slave address is matched, the device must be placed in either the transmit mode and then write data to the SIMD register, or in the receive mode where it must implement a dummy read from the SIMD register to release the SCL line. I2C Communication Timing Diagram Slave Address The transmission of a START signal by the master will be detected by all devices on the I2C bus. To determine which slave device the master wishes to communicate with, the address of the slave device will be sent out immediately following the START signal. All slave devices, after receiving this 7-bit address data, will compare it with their own 7-bit slave address. If the address sent out by the master matches the internal address of the microcontroller slave device, then an internal I2C bus interrupt signal will be generated. The next bit following the address, which is the 8th bit, defines the read/write status and will be saved to the SRW bit of the SIMC1 register. The slave device will then transmit an acknowledge bit, which is a low level, as the 9th bit. The slave device will also set the status flag HAAS when the addresses match. As an I 2C bus interrupt can come from two sources, when the program enters the interrupt subroutine, the HAAS bit should be examined to see whether the interrupt source has come from a matching slave address or from the completion of a data byte transfer. When a slave address is matched, the device must be placed in either the transmit mode and then write data to the SIMD register, or in the receive mode where it must implement a dummy read from the SIMD register to release the SCL line. I2C Bus Read/Write Signal The SRW bit in the SIMC1 register defines whether the slave device wishes to read data from the I2C bus or write data to the I2C bus. The slave device should examine this bit to determine if it is to be a transmitter or a receiver. If the SRW flag is "1" then this indicates that the master device wishes to read data from the I2C bus, therefore the slave device must be setup to send data to the I2C bus as a transmitter. If the SRW flag is "0" then this indicates that the master wishes to send data to the I2C bus, therefore the slave device must be setup to read data from the I2C bus as a receiver. Rev. 1.20 133 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver I2C Bus Slave Address Acknowledge Signal After the master has transmitted a calling address, any slave device on the I 2C bus, whose own internal address matches the calling address, must generate an acknowledge signal. The acknowledge signal will inform the master that a slave device has accepted its calling address. If no acknowledge signal is received by the master then a STOP signal must be transmitted by the master to end the communication. When the HAAS flag is high, the addresses have matched and the slave device must check the SRW flag to determine if it is to be a transmitter or a receiver. If the SRW flag is high, the slave device should be setup to be a transmitter so the HTX bit in the SIMC1 register should be set to "1". If the SRW flag is low, then the microcontroller slave device should be setup as a receiver and the HTX bit in the SIMC1 register should be set to "0". I2C Bus Data and Acknowledge Signal The transmitted data is 8-bits wide and is transmitted after the slave device has acknowledged receipt of its slave address. The order of serial bit transmission is the MSB first and the LSB last. After receipt of 8-bits of data, the receiver must transmit an acknowledge signal, level "0", before it can receive the next data byte. If the slave transmitter does not receive an acknowledge bit signal from the master receiver, then the slave transmitter will release the SDA line to allow the master to send a STOP signal to release the I2C Bus. The corresponding data will be stored in the SIMD register. If setup as a transmitter, the slave device must first write the data to be transmitted into the SIMD register. If setup as a receiver, the slave device must read the transmitted data from the SIMD register. When the slave receiver receives the data byte, it must generate an acknowledge bit, known as TXAK, on the 9th clock. The slave device, which is setup as a transmitter will check the RXAK bit in the SIMC1 register to determine if it is to send another data byte, if not then it will release the SDA line and await the receipt of a STOP signal from the master. I2C Bus ISR Flow Chart Rev. 1.20 134 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver I2C Time-out Control In order to reduce the problem of I2C lockup due to reception of erroneous clock sources, clock, a time-out function is provided. If the clock source to the I2C is not received then after a fixed time period, the I2C circuitry and registers will be reset. The time-out counter starts counting on an I2C bus "START" & "address match" condition, and is cleared by an SCL falling edge. Before the next SCL falling edge arrives, if the time elapsed is greater than the time-out setup by the I2CTOC register, then a time-out condition will occur. The time-out function will stop when an I2C "STOP" condition occurs. S C L S ta rt S R W S la v e A d d r e s s 0 1 S D A 1 1 0 1 0 A C K 1 0 I2 C t i m e - o u t c o u n te r s ta rt S to p S C L 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 S D A I2 C t im e - o u t c o u n t e r r e s e t o n S C L n e g a tiv e tr a n s itio n I2C Time-out When an I2C time-out counter overflow occurs, the counter will stop and the I2CTOEN bit will be cleared to zero and the I2CTF bit will be set high to indicate that a time-out condition as occurred. The time-out condition will also generate an interrupt which uses the I2C interrrupt vector. When an I2C time-out occurs the I2C internal circuitry will be reset and the registers will be reset into the following condition: After I2C Time-out Register SIMDR, SIMAR, SIMC0 No change SIMC1 Reset to POR condition I2C Registers After Time-out The I2CTOF flag can be cleared by the application program. There are 64 time-out periods which can be selected using bits in the I2CTOC register. The time-out time is given by the formula: ((1~64)×32)/fLIRC. This gives a range of about 1ms to 64ms. Note also that the LIRC oscillator is continuously enabled. Rev. 1.20 135 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Peripheral Clock Output The Peripheral Clock Output allows the device to supply external hardware with a clock signal synchronised to the microcontroller clock. Peripheral Clock Operation As the peripheral clock output pin, PCK, is shared with I/O line, the required pin function is chosen via PCKEN in the SIMC0 register. The Peripheral Clock function is controlled using the SIMC0 register. The clock source for the Peripheral Clock Output can originate from either the TM0 CCRP match frequency/2 or a divided ratio of the internal fSYS clock. The PCKEN bit in the SIMC0 register is the overall on/off control, setting PCKEN bit to "1" enables the Peripheral Clock, setting PCKEN bit to "0" disables it. The required division ratio of the system clock is selected using the PCKP1 and PCKP0 bits in the same register. If the device enters the SLEEP Mode this will disable the Peripheral Clock output. SIMC0 Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 Name SIM2 SIM1 SIM0 PCKEN 3 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 1 1 1 0 0 2 1 0 SIMEN — R/W R/W — 0 0 — PCKPSC1 PCKPSC0 Bit 7~5 SIM2~SIM0: SIM Operating Mode Control Described elsewhere Bit 4 PCKEN: PCK Output Pin Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 3~2 PCKPSC1, PCKPSC0: Select PCK output pin frequency 0: fSYS 1: fSYS/4 2: fSYS/8 3: TM0 CCRP match frequency/2 Bit 1 SIMEN: SIM Control Described elsewhere Bit 0 Unimplemented, read as "0" 136 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Interrupts Interrupts are an important part of any microcontroller system. When an external event or an internal function such as a Touch Action or Timer Module requires microcontroller attention, their corresponding interrupt will enforce a temporary suspension of the main program allowing the microcontroller to direct attention to their respective needs. The devices contains several external interrupt and internal interrupts functions. The external interrupt is generated by the action of the external INT pin, while the internal interrupts are generated by various internal functions such as the Touch Keys, Timer Module, Time Base, SIM etc. Interrupt Registers Overall interrupt control, which basically means the setting of request flags when certain microcontroller conditions occur and the setting of interrupt enable bits by the application program, is controlled by a series of registers, located in the Special Purpose Data Memory, as shown in the accompanying table. The number of registers depends upon the device chosen but fall into three categories. The first is the INTC0~INTC3 registers which setup the primary interrupts, the second is the MFI0~MFI5 registers which setup the Multi-function interrupts. Finally there is an INTEG register to setup the external interrupt trigger edge type. Each register contains a number of enable bits to enable or disable individual registers as well as interrupt flags to indicate the presence of an interrupt request. The naming convention of these follows a specific pattern. First is listed an abbreviated interrupt type, then the (optional) number of that interrupt followed by either an E for enable/disable bit or F for request flag. Function Enable Bit Request Flag Notes Global EMI — — INT Pin INTnE INTnF N=0 or 1 Touch Key Module TKMnE TKMnF n=0~4 SIM SIM SIF — EEPROM DEE DEF — Multi-function MFnE MFnF n=0~5 Time Base TBnE TBnF N=0 or 1 LVD LVF LVE — External Peripheral TM XPE XPF — TnPE TnPF n=0~2 TnAE TnAF n=0~2 TnBE TnBF n=1 Interrupt Register Bit Naming Conventions Rev. 1.20 137 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Interrupt Register Contents BS85B12-3 Name INTEG Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — INT1S1 INT1S0 INT0S1 INT0S0 INTC0 — SIMF INT1F INT0F SIME INT1E INT0E EMI INTC1 TB0F TKM2F TKM1F TKM0F TB0E TKM2E TKM1E TKM0E INTC2 MF3F MF2F MF1F MF0F MF3E MF2E MF1E MF0E MFI0 M116CTF D6 M016CTF D4 M116CTE D2 M016CTE D0 MFI1 T0AF T0PF M216CTF D4 T0AE T0PE M216CTE D0 MFI2 — T1BF T1AF T1PF — T1BE T1AE T1PE MFI3 DEF LVF XPF TB1F DEE LVE XPE TB1E 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — INT1S1 INT1S0 INT0S1 INT0S0 BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Name INTEG Bit INTC0 — SIMF INT1F INT0F SIME INT1E INT0E EMI INTC1 TB0F TKM2F TKM1F TKM0F TB0E TKM2E TKM1E TKM0E INTC2 MF3F MF2F MF1F MF0F MF3E MF2E MF1E MF0E INTC3 MF5F MF4F TKM4F TKM3F MF5E MF4E TKM4E TKM3E MFI0 M116CTF D6 M016CTF D4 M116CTE D2 M016CTE D0 MFI1 T0AF T0PF M216CTF D4 T0AE T0PE M216CTE D0 MFI2 — T1BF T1AF T1PF — T1BE T1AE T1PE MFI3 DEF LVF XPF TB1F DEE LVE XPE TB1E MFI4 M416CTF D6 M316CTF D4 M416CTE D2 M316CTE D0 MFI5 — — T2AF T2PF — — T2AE T2PE INTEG Register – All devices Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — — — INT1S1 INT1S0 INT0S1 INT0S0 R/W — — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — — — — 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~2 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1~0 INT1S1, INT1S0: interrupt edge control for INT1 pin 00: disable 01: rising edge 10: falling edge 11: rising and falling edges Bit 1~0 INT0S1, INT0S0: interrupt edge control for INT0 pin 00: disable 01: rising edge 10: falling edge 11: rising and falling edges 138 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver INTC0 Register – All devices Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — SIMF INT1F INT0F SIME INT1E INT0E EMI R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 unimplemented, read as "0" SIMF: SIM interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request INT1F: INT1 pin interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request INT0F: INT0 pin interrupt request flag 0: No request 1: Interrupt request SIME: SIM interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable INT1E: INT1 pin interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable INT0E: INT0 pin interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable EMI: Global interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable INTC1 Register – All devices Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TB0F TKM2F TKM1F TKM0F TB0E TKM2E TKM1E TKM0E R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 POR Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Rev. 1.20 TB0F: Time Base 0 interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request TKM2F: Touch Key Module 2 interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request TKM1F: Touch Key Module 1 interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request TKM0F: Touch Key Module 0 interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request TB0E: Time Base 0 interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable TKM2E: Touch Key Module 2 interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable TKM1E: Touch Key Module 1 interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable TKM0E: Touch Key Module 0 interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable 139 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver INTC2 Register – All devices Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name MF3F MF2F MF1F MF0F MF3E MF2E MF1E MF0E R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 MF3F: Multi-function interrupt 3 request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request MF2F: Multi-function interrupt 2 request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request MF1F: Multi-function interrupt 1 request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request MF0F: Multi-function interrupt 0 request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request MF3E: Multi-function interrupt 3 control 0: disable 1: enable MF2E: Multi-function interrupt 2 control 0: disable 1: enable MF1E: Multi-function interrupt 1 control 0: disable 1: enable MF0E: Multi-function interrupt 0 control 0: disable 1: enable INTC3 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 only Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name MF5F MF4F TKM4F TKM3F MF5E MF4E TKM4E TKM3E R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 POR Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 bit 0 Rev. 1.20 MF5F: Multi-function interrupt 5 request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request MF4F: Multi-function interrupt 4 request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request TKM4F: Touch Key Module 4 interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request TKM3F: Touch Key Module 3 interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request MF5E: Multi-function interrupt 5 control 0: disable 1: enable MF4E: Multi-function interrupt 4 control 0: disable 1: enable TKM4E: Touch Key Module 4 interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable TKM3E: Touch Key Module 3 interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable 140 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver MFI0 Register – All devices Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name M116CTF D6 M016CTF D4 M116CTE D2 M016CTE D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 M116CTF: Touch Key Module 1 16-bit counter interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 6 D6: This bit must be cleared to zero Bit 5 M016CTF: Touch Key Module 0 16-bit counter interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 4 D4: This bit must be cleared to zero Bit 3 M116CTE: Touch Key Module 1 16-bit timer interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 2 D2: This bit must be cleared to zero Bit 1 M016CTE: Touch Key Module 0 16-bit timer interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 0 D0: This bit must be cleared to zero MFI1 Register – All devices Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T0AF T0PF M216CTF D4 T0AE T0PE M216CTE D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 T0AF: TM0 Comparator A match interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 6 T0PF: TM0 Comparator P match interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 5 M216CTF: Touch Key Module 2 16-bit counter interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 4 D4: This bit must be cleared to zero Bit 3 T0AE: TM0 Comparator A match interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 2 T0PE: TM0 Comparator P match interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 1 M216CTE: Touch Key Module 2 16-bit counter interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 0 D0: This bit must be cleared to zero 141 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver MFI2 Register – All devices Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — T1BF T1AF T1PF — T1BE T1AE T1PE R/W — R/W R/W R/W — R/W R/W R/W POR — 0 0 0 — 0 0 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 unimplemented, read as "0" T1BF: TM1 Comparator B match interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request T1AF: TM1 Comparator A match interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request T1PF: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request unimplemented, read as "0" T1BE: TM1 Comparator B match interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable T1AE: TM1 Comparator A match interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable T1PE: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable MFI3 Register – All devices Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DEF LVF XPF TB1F DEE LVE XPE TB1E R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 POR Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Rev. 1.20 DEF: Data EEPROM interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request LVF: LVD interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request XPF: External peripheral interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request TB1F: Time Base 1 interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request DEE: Data EEPROM interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable LVE: LVD interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable XPE: External Peripheral interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable TB1E: Time Base 1 interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable 142 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver MFI4 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 only Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name M416CTF D6 M316CTF D4 M416CTE D2 M316CTE D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 M416CTF: Touch Key Module 4 16-bit counter interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 6 D6: This bit must be cleared to zero Bit 5 M316CTF: Touch Key Module 3 16-bit counter interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 4 D4: This bit must be cleared to zero Bit 3 M416CTE: Touch Key Module 4 16-bit counter interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 2 D2: This bit must be cleared to zero Bit 1 M316CTE: Touch Key Module 3 16-bit counter interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 0 D0: This bit must be cleared to zero MFI5 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 only Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — T2AF T2PF — — T2AE T2PE R/W — — R/W R/W — — R/W R/W POR — — 0 0 — — 0 0 Bit 7~6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5 T2AF: TM2 Comparator A match interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 4 T2PF: TM2 Comparator P match interrupt request flag 0: no request 1: interrupt request Bit 3~2 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 1 T2AE: TM2 Comparator A match interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 0 T2PE: TM2 Comparator P match interrupt control 0: disable 1: enable 143 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Interrupt Operation When the conditions for an interrupt event occur, such as a Touch Key Counter overflow, Timer Module overflow, etc. the relevant interrupt request flag will be set. Whether the request flag actually generates a program jump to the relevant interrupt vector is determined by the condition of the interrupt enable bit. If the enable bit is set high then the program will jump to its relevant vector; if the enable bit is zero then although the interrupt request flag is set an actual interrupt will not be generated and the program will not jump to the relevant interrupt vector. The global interrupt enable bit, if cleared to zero, will disable all interrupts. When an interrupt is generated, the Program Counter, which stores the address of the next instruction to be executed, will be transferred onto the stack. The Program Counter will then be loaded with a new address which will be the value of the corresponding interrupt vector. The microcontroller will then fetch its next instruction from this interrupt vector. The instruction at this vector will usually be a JMP instruction which will jump to another section of program which is known as the interrupt service routine. Here is located the code to control the appropriate interrupt. The interrupt service routine must be terminated with a RETI instruction, which retrieves the original Program Counter address from the stack and allows the microcontroller to continue with normal execution at the point where the interrupt occurred. The various interrupt enable bits, together with their associated request flags, are shown in the accompanying diagrams with their order of priority. Some interrupt sources have their own individual vector while others share the same multi-function interrupt vector. Once an interrupt subroutine is serviced, all the other interrupts will be blocked, as the global interrupt enable bit, EMI bit will be cleared automatically. This will prevent any further interrupt nesting from occurring. However, if other interrupt requests occur during this interval, although the interrupt will not be immediately serviced, the request flag will still be recorded. If an interrupt requires immediate servicing while the program is already in another interrupt service routine, the EMI bit should be set after entering the routine, to allow interrupt nesting. If the stack is full, the interrupt request will not be acknowledged, even if the related interrupt is enabled, until the Stack Pointer is decremented. If immediate service is desired, the stack must be prevented from becoming full. In case of simultaneous requests, the accompanying diagram shows the priority that is applied. All of the interrupt request flags when set will wake-up the device if it is in SLEEP or IDLE Mode, however to prevent a wake-up from occurring the corresponding flag should be set before the device enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode. Rev. 1.20 144 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Interrupt Structure Rev. 1.20 145 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver External Interrupt The external interrupt is controlled by signal transitions on the INT0 and INT1 pins. An external interrupt request will take place when the external interrupt request flag, INT0F or INT1F, is set, which will occur when a transition, whose type is chosen by the edge select bits, appears on the external interrupt pin. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and respective external interrupt enable bit, INT0E or INT1E, must first be set. Additionally the correct interrupt edge type must be selected using the INTEG register to enable the external interrupt function and to choose the trigger edge type. As the external interrupt pin is pin-shared with I/O pin, it can only be configured as external interrupt pin if the external interrupt enable bit in the corresponding interrupt register has been set. The pin must also be setup as an input by setting the corresponding bit in the port control register. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the correct transition type appears on the external interrupt pin, a subroutine call to the external interrupt vector, will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the external interrupt request flag, INTF, will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts. Note that any pull-high resistor selections on the external interrupt pin will remain valid even if the pin is used as an external interrupt input. The INTEG register is used to select the type of active edge that will trigger the external interrupt. A choice of either rising or falling or both edge types can be chosen to trigger an external interrupt. Note that the INTEG register can also be used to disable the external interrupt function. Multi-function Interrupt Within these devices there are four or six Multi-function interrupts. Unlike the other independent interrupts, these interrupts have no independent source, but rather are formed from the Touch Key Module, Timer Module, Low Voltage Detector, EEPROM, External Peripheral and Time Base interrupt sources. A Multi-function interrupt request will take place when any of the Multi-function interrupt request flags, MFnF are set. The Multi-function interrupt flags will be set when any of their included functions generate an interrupt request flag. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, when the Multi-function interrupt is enabled and the stack is not full, and either one of the interrupts contained within each of Multi-function interrupt occurs, a subroutine call to one of the Multi-function interrupt vectors will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the related Multi-Function request flag, will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts. However, it must be noted that, although the Multi-function Interrupt flags will be automatically reset when the interrupt is serviced, the request flags from the original source of the Multi-function interrupts, namely the Touch Key module timer interrupts, will not be automatically reset and must be manually reset by the application program. Time Base Interrupts The function of the Time Base Interrupts is to provide regular time signal in the form of an internal interrupt. They are controlled by the overflow signals from their respective timer functions. When these happens their respective interrupt request flags, TB0F or TB1F will be set. To allow the program to branch to their respective interrupt vector addresses, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI and Time Base enable bits, TB0E or TB1E, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the Time Base overflows, a subroutine call to their respective vector locations will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the respective interrupt request flag, TB0F or TB1F, will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be cleared to disable other interrupts. Rev. 1.20 146 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver The purpose of the Time Base Interrupt is to provide an interrupt signal at fixed time periods. Their clock sources originate from the internal clock source fTB. This fTB input clock passes through a divider, the division ratio of which is selected by programming the appropriate bits in the TBC register to obtain longer interrupt periods whose value ranges. The clock source that generates fTB, which in turn controls the Time Base interrupt period, can originate from several different sources, as shown in the System Operating Mode section. Time Base Structure – BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3 T B 0 2 ~ T B 0 0 fS Y S fT L X T /4 M B C fT U B X T B C K B it 2 2 8 ~ 2 1 5 T im e B a s e 0 In te r r u p t 1 2 ~ 2 1 5 T im e B a s e 1 In te r r u p t T B 1 1 ~ T B 1 0 Time Base Structure – BS85C20-5 TBC Register – BS85C12-3/BS85C20-3 Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TBON TBCK TB11 TB10 D3 TB02 TB01 TB00 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 Bit 7 TBON: TB0 and TB1 Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 6 TBCK: Select fTB Clock 0: fTBC 1: fSYS/4 Bit 5~4 TB11~TB10: Select Time Base 1 Time-out Period 0: 4096/fTB 1: 8192/fTB 2: 16384/fTB 3: 32768/fTB Bit 3 Undefined bit This bit can be read or written by user software program. Bit 2~0 TB02~TB00: Select Time Base 0 Time-out Period 0: 256/fTB 1: 512/fTB 2: 1024/fTB 3: 2048/fTB 4: 4096/fTB 5: 8192/fTB 6: 16384/fTB 7: 32768/fTB 147 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TBC Register – BS85C20-5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TBON TBCK TB11 TB10 LXTLP TB02 TB01 TB00 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 Bit 7 TBON: TB0 and TB1 Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 6 TBCK: Select fTB Clock 0: fTBC 1: fSYS/4 Bit 5~4 TB11~TB10: Select Time Base 1 Time-out Period 0: 4096/fTB 1: 8192/fTB 2: 16384/fTB 3: 32768/fTB Bit 3 LXTLP: LXT Low Power Control 0: disable 1: enable Bit 2~0 TB02~TB00: Select Time Base 0 Time-out Period 0: 256/fTB 1: 512/fTB 2: 1024/fTB 3: 2048/fTB 4: 4096/fTB 5: 8192/fTB 6: 16384/fTB 7: 32768/fTB External Peripheral Interrupt The External Peripheral Interrupt operates in a similar way to the external interrupt and is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. A Peripheral Interrupt request will take place when the External Peripheral Interrupt request flag, XPF, is set, which occurs when a negative edge transition appears on the PINT pin. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, external peripheral interrupt enable bit, XPE, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a negative transition appears on the External Peripheral Interrupt pin, a subroutine call to the respective Multi-function Interrupt, will take place. When the External Peripheral Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request flag will be also automatically cleared. As the XPF flag will not be automatically cleared, it has to be cleared by the application program. The external peripheral interrupt pin is pin-shared with several other pins with different functions. It must therefore be properly configured to enable it to operate as an External Peripheral Interrupt pin. Rev. 1.20 148 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver LVD Interrupt The Low Voltage Detector Interrupt is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. An LVD Interrupt request will take place when the LVD Interrupt request flag, LVF, is set, which occurs when the Low Voltage Detector function detects a low power supply voltage. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, Low Voltage Interrupt enable bit, LVE, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a low voltage condition occurs, a subroutine call to the Multi-function Interrupt vector, will take place. When the Low Voltage Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request flag will be also automatically cleared. As the LVF flag will not be automatically cleared, it has to be cleared by the application program. TM Interrupts The Compact and Standard Type TMs have two interrupts each, while the Enhanced Type TM has three interrupts. All of the TM interrupts are contained within the Multi-function Interrupts. For each of the Compact and Standard Type TMs there are two interrupt request flags TnPF and TnAF and two enable bits TnPE and TnAE. For the Enhanced Type TM there are three interrupt request flags TnPF, TnAF and TnBF and three enable bits TnPE, TnAE and TnBE. A TM interrupt request will take place when any of the TM request flags are set, a situation which occurs when a TM comparator P, A or B match situation happens. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, respective TM Interrupt enable bit, and relevant Multi-function Interrupt enable bit, MFnE, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a TM comparator match situation occurs, a subroutine call to the relevant Multi-function Interrupt vector locations, will take place. When the TM interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the related MFnF flag will be automatically cleared. As the TM interrupt request flags will not be automatically cleared, they have to be cleared by the application program. EEPROM Interrupt The EEPROM Interrupt, is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. An EEPROM Interrupt request will take place when the EEPROM Interrupt request flag, DEF, is set, which occurs when an EEPROM Write cycle ends. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, EEPROM Interrupt enable bit, DEE, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and an EEPROM Write cycle ends, a subroutine call to the respective Multi-function Interrupt vector, will take place. When the EEPROM Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request flag will be also automatically cleared. As the DEF flag will not be automatically cleared, it has to be cleared by the application program. Touch Key Interrupts For a Touch Key interrupt to occur, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and the corresponding Touch Key interrupt enable TKMnE must be first set. An actual Touch Key interrupt will take place when the Touch Key request flag. TKMnF, is set, a situation that will occur when the 13-bit time slot counter in the relevant Touch Key module overflows. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the Touch Key time slot counter overflow occurs, a subroutine call to the relevant Touch Key interrupt vector, will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the Touch Key interrupt request flag, TKMnF, will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts. Rev. 1.20 149 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SIM Interrupt A SIM Interrupt request will take place when the SIM Interrupt request flag, SIMF, is set, which occurs when a byte of data has been received or transmitted by the SIM interface. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and the Serial Interface Interrupt enable bit, SIME, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a byte of data has been transmitted or received by the SIM interface, a subroutine call to the respective interrupt vector, will take place. When the Serial Interface Interrupt is serviced, the SIM interrupt request flag, SIF, will be automatically cleared and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts. Interrupt Wake-up Function Each of the interrupt functions has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode. A wake-up is generated when an interrupt request flag changes from low to high and is independent of whether the interrupt is enabled or not. Therefore, even though the device is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode and its system oscillator stopped, situations such as external edge transitions on the external interrupt pins, a low power supply voltage or comparator input change may cause their respective interrupt flag to be set high and consequently generate an interrupt. Care must therefore be taken if spurious wake-up situations are to be avoided. If an interrupt wake-up function is to be disabled then the corresponding interrupt request flag should be set high before the device enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode. The interrupt enable bits have no effect on the interrupt wake-up function. Programming Considerations By disabling the relevant interrupt enable bits, a requested interrupt can be prevented from being serviced, however, once an interrupt request flag is set, it will remain in this condition in the interrupt register until the corresponding interrupt is serviced or until the request flag is cleared by the application program. Where a certain interrupt is contained within a Multi-function interrupt, then when the interrupt service routine is executed, as only the Multi-function interrupt request flags, MFnF, will be automatically cleared, the individual request flag for the function needs to be cleared by the application program. It is recommended that programs do not use the "CALL" instruction within the interrupt service subroutine. Interrupts often occur in an unpredictable manner or need to be serviced immediately. If only one stack is left and the interrupt is not well controlled, the original control sequence will be damaged once a CALL subroutine is executed in the interrupt subroutine. Every interrupt has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when it is in SLEEP or IDLE Mode, the wake up being generated when the interrupt request flag changes from low to high. If it is required to prevent a certain interrupt from waking up the microcontroller then its respective request flag should be first set high before enter SLEEP or IDLE Mode. As only the Program Counter is pushed onto the stack, then when the interrupt is serviced, if the contents of the accumulator, status register or other registers are altered by the interrupt service program, their contents should be saved to the memory at the beginning of the interrupt service routine. To return from an interrupt subroutine, either a RET or RETI instruction may be executed. The RETI instruction in addition to executing a return to the main program also automatically sets the EMI bit high to allow further interrupts. The RET instruction however only executes a return to the main program leaving the EMI bit in its present zero state and therefore disabling the execution of further interrupts. Rev. 1.20 150 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Low Voltage Detector – LVD Each device has a Low Voltage Detector function, also known as LVD. This enabled the device to monitor the power supply voltage, VDD, and provide a warning signal should it fall below a certain level. This function may be especially useful in battery applications where the supply voltage will gradually reduce as the battery ages, as it allows an early warning battery low signal to be generated. The Low Voltage Detector also has the capability of generating an interrupt signal. LVD Register The Low Voltage Detector function is controlled using a single register with the name LVDC. Three bits in this register, VLVD2~VLVD0, are used to select one of eight fixed voltages below which a low voltage condition will be detemined. A low voltage condition is indicated when the LVDO bit is set. If the LVDO bit is low, this indicates that the VDD voltage is above the preset low voltage value. The LVDEN bit is used to control the overall on/off function of the low voltage detector. Setting the bit high will enable the low voltage detector. Clearing the bit to zero will switch off the internal low voltage detector circuits. As the low voltage detector will consume a certain amount of power, it may be desirable to switch off the circuit when not in use, an important consideration in power sensitive battery powered applications. LVDC Register Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — LVDO LVDEN — VLVD2 VLVD1 VLVD0 R/W — — R R/W — R/W R/W R/W POR — — 0 0 — 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5 LVDO: LVD Output Flag 0: No Low Voltage Detect 1: Low Voltage Detect Bit 4 LVDEN: Low Voltage Detector Control 0: Disable 1: Enable Bit 3 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 2~0 VLVD2 ~ VLVD0: Select LVD Voltage 000: undefined 001: undefined 010: undefined 011: 2.7V 100: 3.0V 101: 3.3V 110: 3.6V 111: 4.2V 151 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver LVD Operation The Low Voltage Detector function operates by comparing the power supply voltage, VDD, with a pre-specified voltage level stored in the LVDC register. This has a range of between 2.0V and 4.2V. When the power supply voltage, VDD, falls below this pre-determined value, the LVDO bit will be set high indicating a low power supply voltage condition. The Low Voltage Detector function is supplied by a reference voltage which will be automatically enabled. When the device is powered down the low voltage detector will remain active if the LVDEN bit is high. After enabling the Low Voltage Detector, a time delay tLVDS should be allowed for the circuitry to stabilise before reading the LVDO bit. Note also that as the VDD voltage may rise and fall rather slowly, at the voltage nears that of VLVD, there may be multiple bit LVDO transitions. LVD Operation The Low Voltage Detector also has its own interrupt which is contained within one of the Multifunction interrupts, providing an alternative means of low voltage detection, in addition to polling the LVDO bit. The interrupt will only be generated after a delay of tLVD after the LVDO bit has been set high by a low voltage condition. When the device is powered down the Low Voltage Detector will remain active if the LVDEN bit is high. In this case, the LVF interrupt request flag will be set, causing an interrupt to be generated if VDD falls below the preset LVD voltage. This will cause the device to wake-up from the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, however if the Low Voltage Detector wake up function is not required then the LVF flag should be first set high before the device enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode. LCD Driver – SCOM and SSEG Function The devices can drive LCD panels by simulating LCD signals on their I/O pins using the application program. Both Command and Segment signals can be emulated in this way. LCD Operation The LCD driving Common pins, SCOM0~SCOM3, and Segment pins, SSEG0~SSEGn, are pin shared with other I/O pins. These LCD driving pins are configured using a series of LCD control registers which in addition to controlling the overall on/off function also controls the bias voltage setup function. This enables the LCD COM and SEG driver to generate the necessary VSS, (1/3)VDD, (2/3)VDD voltage and VDD levels for full LCD 1/3 bias operation. The SLCDEN bit in the LCD control register is the overall master control for the LCD driver, and this bit is used in conjunction with the COMnEN and SEGnEN bits to select which I/O Port pins are used for LCD driving. Note that the Port Control register does not need to first setup the pins as outputs to enable the LCD driver operation. Rev. 1.20 152 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver V D D V D D V D D S C O M 0 S C O M 1 (2 /3 )V D D S C O M 2 S C O M 3 A n a lo g S w itc h L C D V o lta g e S e le c t C ir c u it (1 /3 )V D D S S E G 0 S S E G 1 V S S S S E G n V S S V S S LCD Driver Structure The accompanying waveform diagram shows a typical 1/3 Bias LCD waveform generated using the application program. Note that the depiction of a "1" in the diagram illustrates an illuminated LCD pixel. The COM signal polarity generated on pins SCOM0~SCOM3, whether 0 or 1, are generated using the corresponding I/O data registers, which are bits PB0~PB3 in the PB register. Note: The logical values shown in the diagram are the PB I/O register values, PB0~PB3. 1/3 Bias LCD Waveform Rev. 1.20 153 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver A cyclic LCD waveform includes two frames, known as Frame 0 and Frame 1 for which the following offers a functional explanation. In Frame 0 To select Frame 0 clear the FRAME bit to 0. In frame 0, the COM signal output can have a value of VDD, or have a Vbias value of 1/3VDD. The SEG signal can have a value of VSS, or have a Vbias value of 2/3VDD. In Frame 1 In frame 1, the COM signal output can have a value of VSS, have a Vbias value of 2/3VDD. The SEG signal can have a value of VDD have a Vbias value of 1/3VDD. The COM0~COMn waveform is controlled by the application program using the FRAME bit, and the corresponding I/O data register for the respective COM pin to determine whether the COM0~COMn output has a value of either VDD, VSS or Vbias. The SEG0~SEGm waveform is controlled in a similar way using the FRAME bit and the corresponding I/O data register for the respective SEG pin to determine whether the SEG0~SEGn output has a value of either VDD, VSS or Vbias. LCD Bias Control The LCD COM and SEG driver enable a range of selections to be provided to suit the requirement of the LCD panel which are being used. The bias resistor choice is implemented using the ISEL1 and ISEL0 bits in the LCD control register. LCD Driver Registers SLCDC0 Register Bit 7 6 5 Name FRAME ISEL1 ISEL0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 Bit 6~5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Rev. 1.20 4 3 2 1 0 SLCDEN COM3EN COM2EN COM1EN COM0EN FRAME: Present Frame output select – Frame 0 or Frame 1 0: Frame 0 1: Frame 1 ISEL1, ISEL0: SCOM and SSEG operating current selection – VDD=5V 0: 25µA 1: 50µA 2: 100µA 3: 200µA SLCDEN: SCOM and SSEG module on/off control 0: disable 1: enable The SCOMn and SSEGm lines can be enabled using COMnEN and SEGmEN if SLCDEN=1. When SLCDEN=0, then the SCOMn and SSEGm outputs will be fixed at a VDD level. COM3EN: SCOM3 or other function selection 0: Other function 1: SCOM3 COM2EN: SCOM2 or other function selection 0: Other function 1: SCOM2 COM1EN: SCOM1 or other function selection 0: Other function 1: SCOM1 COM0EN: SCOM0 or other function selection 0: Other function 1: SCOM0 154 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SLCDC1 Register Bit Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SEG7EN SEG6EN SEG5EN SEG4EN SEG3EN SEG2EN SEG1EN SEG0EN R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 SEG7EN~SEG0EN: SSEG7~SSEG0 or other function selection 0: Other function 1: SSEG7~SSEG0 SLCDC2 Register – BS85B12-3 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — SEG13EN SEG12EN SEG11EN SEG10EN SEG9EN SEG8EN R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — — 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5~0 SEG13EN~SEG8EN: SSEG13~SSEG8 or other function selection 0: Other function 1: SSEG13~SSEG8 SLCDC2 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Bit Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SEG15EN SEG14EN SEG13EN SEG12EN SEG11EN SEG10EN SEG9EN SEG8EN R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Bit 7~6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5~0 SEG15EN~SEG8EN: SSEG15~SSEG8 or other function selection 0: Other function 1: SSEG15~SSEG8 SLCDC3 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Rev. 1.20 Bit 7 6 Name TCK2PS — 5 4 3 2 R/W R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 — 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEG21EN SEG20EN SEG19EN SEG18EN SEG17EN SEG16EN Bit 7 TCK2PS: TCK2 Pin Remapping Control Described elsewhere Bit 6 unimplemented, read as "0" Bit 5~0 SEG21EN~SEG16EN: SSEG21~SSEG16 or other function selection 0: Other function 1: SSEG21~SSEG16 155 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver LED Driver The devices contain an LED driver function offering high current output drive capability which can be used to drive external LEDs. LED Driver Operation Depending upon which device is chosen various I/O pins have a capability of providing LED high current drive outputs. Device LED Drive Pins BS85B12-3 PA0~PA7 (high source current) PB0~PB5 (high sink current) BS85C20-3 /BS85C20-5 PA0~PA7 (high source current) PB0~PB7 (high sink current) PE0~PE5 (high source current) Whether a normal current sink capability or high current sink capability is used, the selection is made using the SLEDCn registers. LED Driver Registers SLEDC0 Register – BS85B12-3 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — — 0 0 0 0 0 0 POR Bit 7~6 Bit 5~0 unimplemented, read as "0" D5~D0: PB5~PB0 I/O output sink current select 0: Normal output sink current 1: ×2 output sink current SLEDC0 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 D7~D0: PB7~PB0 I/O output sink current select 0: Normal output sink current 1: ×2 output sink current SLEDC1 Register – All Devices Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~0 D7~D0: PA7~PA0 I/O output source current select 0: Normal output source current 1: ×2 output source current SLEDC2 Register – BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name — — D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W POR — — 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7~6 Bit 5~0 Rev. 1.20 unimplemented, read as "0" D5~D0: PE5~PE0 I/O output source current select 0: Normal output source current 1: ×2 output source current 156 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Application Circuits Note: "#" may be resistor or capacitor. The resistance of "#" must be greater than 1kΩ or the capacitance of "#" must be less than 1nF. Rev. 1.20 157 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Instruction Set Introduction Central to the successful operation of any microcontroller is its instruction set, which is a set of program instruction codes that directs the microcontroller to perform certain operations. In the case of Holtek microcontroller, a comprehensive and flexible set of over 60 instructions is provided to enable programmers to implement their application with the minimum of programming overheads. For easier understanding of the various instruction codes, they have been subdivided into several functional groupings. Instruction Timing Most instructions are implemented within one instruction cycle. The exceptions to this are branch, call, or table read instructions where two instruction cycles are required. One instruction cycle is equal to 4 system clock cycles, therefore in the case of an 8MHz system oscillator, most instructions would be implemented within 0.5μs and branch or call instructions would be implemented within 1μs. Although instructions which require one more cycle to implement are generally limited to the JMP, CALL, RET, RETI and table read instructions, it is important to realize that any other instructions which involve manipulation of the Program Counter Low register or PCL will also take one more cycle to implement. As instructions which change the contents of the PCL will imply a direct jump to that new address, one more cycle will be required. Examples of such instructions would be "CLR PCL" or "MOV PCL, A". For the case of skip instructions, it must be noted that if the result of the comparison involves a skip operation then this will also take one more cycle, if no skip is involved then only one cycle is required. Moving and Transferring Data The transfer of data within the microcontroller program is one of the most frequently used operations. Making use of three kinds of MOV instructions, data can be transferred from registers to the Accumulator and vice-versa as well as being able to move specific immediate data directly into the Accumulator. One of the most important data transfer applications is to receive data from the input ports and transfer data to the output ports. Arithmetic Operations The ability to perform certain arithmetic operations and data manipulation is a necessary feature of most microcontroller applications. Within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set are a range of add and subtract instruction mnemonics to enable the necessary arithmetic to be carried out. Care must be taken to ensure correct handling of carry and borrow data when results exceed 255 for addition and less than 0 for subtraction. The increment and decrement instructions INC, INCA, DEC and DECA provide a simple means of increasing or decreasing by a value of one of the values in the destination specified. Rev. 1.20 158 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Logical and Rotate Operation The standard logical operations such as AND, OR, XOR and CPL all have their own instruction within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set. As with the case of most instructions involving data manipulation, data must pass through the Accumulator which may involve additional programming steps. In all logical data operations, the zero flag may be set if the result of the operation is zero. Another form of logical data manipulation comes from the rotate instructions such as RR, RL, RRC and RLC which provide a simple means of rotating one bit right or left. Different rotate instructions exist depending on program requirements. Rotate instructions are useful for serial port programming applications where data can be rotated from an internal register into the Carry bit from where it can be examined and the necessary serial bit set high or low. Another application which rotate data operations are used is to implement multiplication and division calculations. Branches and Control Transfer Program branching takes the form of either jumps to specified locations using the JMP instruction or to a subroutine using the CALL instruction. They differ in the sense that in the case of a subroutine call, the program must return to the instruction immediately when the subroutine has been carried out. This is done by placing a return instruction "RET" in the subroutine which will cause the program to jump back to the address right after the CALL instruction. In the case of a JMP instruction, the program simply jumps to the desired location. There is no requirement to jump back to the original jumping off point as in the case of the CALL instruction. One special and extremely useful set of branch instructions are the conditional branches. Here a decision is first made regarding the condition of a certain data memory or individual bits. Depending upon the conditions, the program will continue with the next instruction or skip over it and jump to the following instruction. These instructions are the key to decision making and branching within the program perhaps determined by the condition of certain input switches or by the condition of internal data bits. Bit Operations The ability to provide single bit operations on Data Memory is an extremely flexible feature of all Holtek microcontrollers. This feature is especially useful for output port bit programming where individual bits or port pins can be directly set high or low using either the "SET [m].i" or "CLR [m]. i" instructions respectively. The feature removes the need for programmers to first read the 8-bit output port, manipulate the input data to ensure that other bits are not changed and then output the port with the correct new data. This read-modify-write process is taken care of automatically when these bit operation instructions are used. Table Read Operations Data storage is normally implemented by using registers. However, when working with large amounts of fixed data, the volume involved often makes it inconvenient to store the fixed data in the Data Memory. To overcome this problem, Holtek microcontrollers allow an area of Program Memory to be setup as a table where data can be directly stored. A set of easy to use instructions provides the means by which this fixed data can be referenced and retrieved from the Program Memory. Other Operations In addition to the above functional instructions, a range of other instructions also exist such as the "HALT" instruction for Power-down operations and instructions to control the operation of the Watchdog Timer for reliable program operations under extreme electric or electromagnetic environments. For their relevant operations, refer to the functional related sections. Rev. 1.20 159 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Instruction Set Summary The following table depicts a summary of the instruction set categorised according to function and can be consulted as a basic instruction reference using the following listed conventions. Table Conventions x: Bits immediate data m: Data Memory address A: Accumulator i: 0~7 number of bits addr: Program memory address Mnemonic Description Cycles Flag Affected Add Data Memory to ACC Add ACC to Data Memory Add immediate data to ACC Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry Add ACC to Data memory with Carry Subtract immediate data from the ACC Subtract Data Memory from ACC Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry, result in Data Memory Decimal adjust ACC for Addition with result in Data Memory 1 1Note 1 1 1Note 1 1 1Note 1 1Note 1Note Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV Z, C, AC, OV C 1 1 1 1Note 1Note 1Note 1 1 1 1Note 1 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Increment Data Memory with result in ACC Increment Data Memory Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC Decrement Data Memory 1 1Note 1 1Note Z Z Z Z Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC Rotate Data Memory right Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC Rotate Data Memory right through Carry Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC Rotate Data Memory left Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC Rotate Data Memory left through Carry 1 1Note 1 1Note 1 1Note 1 1Note None None C C None None C C Arithmetic ADD A,[m] ADDM A,[m] ADD A,x ADC A,[m] ADCM A,[m] SUB A,x SUB A,[m] SUBM A,[m] SBC A,[m] SBCM A,[m] DAA [m] Logic Operation AND A,[m] OR A,[m] XOR A,[m] ANDM A,[m] ORM A,[m] XORM A,[m] AND A,x OR A,x XOR A,x CPL [m] CPLA [m] Logical AND Data Memory to ACC Logical OR Data Memory to ACC Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC Logical AND ACC to Data Memory Logical OR ACC to Data Memory Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory Logical AND immediate Data to ACC Logical OR immediate Data to ACC Logical XOR immediate Data to ACC Complement Data Memory Complement Data Memory with result in ACC Increment & Decrement INCA [m] INC [m] DECA [m] DEC [m] Rotate RRA [m] RR [m] RRCA [m] RRC [m] RLA [m] RL [m] RLCA [m] RLC [m] Rev. 1.20 160 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Mnemonic Description Cycles Flag Affected Move Data Memory to ACC Move ACC to Data Memory Move immediate data to ACC 1 1Note 1 None None None Clear bit of Data Memory Set bit of Data Memory 1Note 1Note None None Jump unconditionally Skip if Data Memory is zero Skip if Data Memory is zero with data movement to ACC Skip if bit i of Data Memory is zero Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not zero Skip if increment Data Memory is zero Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC Subroutine call Return from subroutine Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC Return from interrupt 2 1Note 1Note 1Note 1Note 1Note 1Note 1Note 1Note 2 2 2 2 None None None None None None None None None None None None None Read table to TBLH and Data Memory Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory 2Note 2Note None None No operation Clear Data Memory Set Data Memory Clear Watchdog Timer Pre-clear Watchdog Timer Pre-clear Watchdog Timer Swap nibbles of Data Memory Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC Enter power down mode 1 1Note 1Note 1 1 1 1Note 1 1 None None None TO, PDF TO, PDF TO, PDF None None TO, PDF Data Move MOV A,[m] MOV [m],A MOV A,x Bit Operation CLR [m].i SET [m].i Branch JMP addr SZ [m] SZA [m] SZ [m].i SNZ [m].i SIZ [m] SDZ [m] SIZA [m] SDZA [m] CALL addr RET RET A,x RETI Table Read TABRDC [m] TABRDL [m] Miscellaneous NOP CLR [m] SET [m] CLR WDT CLR WDT1 CLR WDT2 SWAP [m] SWAPA [m] HALT Note: 1. For skip instructions, if the result of the comparison involves a skip then two cycles are required, if no skip takes place only one cycle is required. 2. Any instruction which changes the contents of the PCL will also require 2 cycles for execution. 3. For the "CLR WDT1" and "CLR WDT2" instructions the TO and PDF flags may be affected by the execution status. The TO and PDF flags are cleared after both "CLR WDT1" and "CLR WDT2" instructions are consecutively executed. Otherwise the TO and PDF flags remain unchanged. Rev. 1.20 161 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Instruction Definition ADC A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) ADCM A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) ADD A,[m] Description Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added. The result is stored in the Accumulator. ACC ← ACC + [m] + C OV, Z, AC, C Add ACC to Data Memory with Carry The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added. The result is stored in the specified Data Memory. [m] ← ACC + [m] + C OV, Z, AC, C Add Data Memory to ACC The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Operation Affected flag(s) ACC ← ACC + [m] OV, Z, AC, C ADD A,x Description Add immediate data to ACC The contents of the Accumulator and the specified immediate data are added. The result is stored in the Accumulator. ACC ← ACC + x OV, Z, AC, C Operation Affected flag(s) ADDM A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) AND A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) AND A,x Description Operation Affected flag(s) ANDM A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 Add ACC to Data Memory The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added. The result is stored in the specified Data Memory. [m] ← ACC + [m] OV, Z, AC, C Logical AND Data Memory to ACC Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator. ACC ← ACC ″AND″ [m] Z Logical AND immediate data to ACC Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bit wise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator. ACC ← ACC ″AND″ x Z Logical AND ACC to Data Memory Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory. [m] ← ACC ″AND″ [m] Z 162 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Affected flag(s) Subroutine call Unconditionally calls a subroutine at the specified address. The Program Counter then increments by 1 to obtain the address of the next instruction which is then pushed onto the stack. The specified address is then loaded and the program continues execution from this new address. As this instruction requires an additional operation, it is a two cycle instruction. Stack ← Program Counter + 1 Program Counter ← addr None CLR [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Clear Data Memory Each bit of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0. [m] ← 00H None CLR [m].i Description Operation Affected flag(s) Clear bit of Data Memory Bit i of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0. [m].i ← 0 None CLR WDT Description Operation Clear Watchdog Timer The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. WDT cleared TO ← 0 PDF ← 0 TO, PDF CALL addr Description Operation Affected flag(s) CLR WDT1 Description Operation Affected flag(s) CLR WDT2 Description Operation Affected flag(s) CPL [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 Pre-clear Watchdog Timer The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in conjunction with CLR WDT2 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT2 to have effect. Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT2 will have no effect. WDT cleared TO ← 0 PDF ← 0 TO, PDF Pre-clear Watchdog Timer The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in conjunction with CLR WDT1 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT1 to have effect. Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT1 will have no effect. WDT cleared TO ← 0 PDF ← 0 TO, PDF Complement Data Memory Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1′s complement). Bits which previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa. [m] ← [m] Z 163 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver CPLA [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Complement Data Memory with result in ACC Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1′s complement). Bits which previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa. The complemented result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged. ACC ← [m] Z Affected flag(s) Decimal-Adjust ACC for addition with result in Data Memory Convert the contents of the Accumulator value to a BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value resulting from the previous addition of two BCD variables. If the low nibble is greater than 9 or if AC flag is set, then a value of 6 will be added to the low nibble. Otherwise the low nibble remains unchanged. If the high nibble is greater than 9 or if the C flag is set, then a value of 6 will be added to the high nibble. Essentially, the decimal conversion is performed by adding 00H, 06H, 60H or 66H depending on the Accumulator and flag conditions. Only the C flag may be affected by this instruction which indicates that if the original BCD sum is greater than 100, it allows multiple precision decimal addition. [m] ← ACC + 00H or [m] ← ACC + 06H or [m] ← ACC + 60H or [m] ← ACC + 66H C DEC [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Decrement Data Memory Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1. [m] ← [m] − 1 Z DECA [m] Description Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1. The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged. ACC ← [m] − 1 Z DAA [m] Description Operation Operation Affected flag(s) Affected flag(s) Enter power down mode This instruction stops the program execution and turns off the system clock. The contents of the Data Memory and registers are retained. The WDT and prescaler are cleared. The power down flag PDF is set and the WDT time-out flag TO is cleared. TO ← 0 PDF ← 1 TO, PDF INC [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Increment Data Memory Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1. [m] ← [m] + 1 Z INCA [m] Description Increment Data Memory with result in ACC Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1. The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged. ACC ← [m] + 1 Z HALT Description Operation Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 164 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Operation Affected flag(s) Jump unconditionally The contents of the Program Counter are replaced with the specified address. Program execution then continues from this new address. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the new address is loaded, it is a two cycle instruction. Program Counter ← addr None MOV A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Move Data Memory to ACC The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator. ACC ← [m] None MOV A,x Description Operation Affected flag(s) Move immediate data to ACC The immediate data specified is loaded into the Accumulator. ACC ← x None MOV [m],A Description Operation Affected flag(s) Move ACC to Data Memory The contents of the Accumulator are copied to the specified Data Memory. [m] ← ACC None NOP Description Operation Affected flag(s) No operation No operation is performed. Execution continues with the next instruction. No operation None OR A,[m] Description Logical OR Data Memory to ACC Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator. ACC ← ACC ″OR″ [m] Z JMP addr Description Operation Affected flag(s) OR A,x Description Operation Affected flag(s) ORM A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) RET Description Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 Logical OR immediate data to ACC Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator. ACC ← ACC ″OR″ x Z Logical OR ACC to Data Memory Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory. [m] ← ACC ″OR″ [m] Z Return from subroutine The Program Counter is restored from the stack. Program execution continues at the restored address. Program Counter ← Stack None 165 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver RET A,x Description Operation Affected flag(s) RETI Description Operation Affected flag(s) RL [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) RLA [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) RLC [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) RLCA [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) RR [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the Accumulator loaded with the specified immediate data. Program execution continues at the restored address. Program Counter ← Stack ACC ← x None Return from interrupt The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the interrupts are re-enabled by setting the EMI bit. EMI is the master interrupt global enable bit. If an interrupt was pending when the RETI instruction is executed, the pending Interrupt routine will be processed before returning to the main program. Program Counter ← Stack EMI ← 1 None Rotate Data Memory left The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into bit 0. [m].(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6) [m].0 ← [m].7 None Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into bit 0. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged. ACC.(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6) ACC.0 ← [m].7 None Rotate Data Memory left through Carry The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 0. [m].(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6) [m].0 ← C C ← [m].7 C Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into the bit 0. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged. ACC.(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6) ACC.0 ← C C ← [m].7 C Rotate Data Memory right The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0 rotated into bit 7. [m].i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6) [m].7 ← [m].0 None 166 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver RRA [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) RRC [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) RRCA [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) SBC A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) SBCM A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) SDZ [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0 rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged. ACC.i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6) ACC.7 ← [m].0 None Rotate Data Memory right through Carry The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7. [m].i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6) [m].7 ← C C ← [m].0 C Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged. ACC.i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6) ACC.7 ← C C ← [m].0 C Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1. ACC ← ACC − [m] − C OV, Z, AC, C Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry and result in Data Memory The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1. [m] ← ACC − [m] − C OV, Z, AC, C Skip if decrement Data Memory is 0 The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0 the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction. [m] ← [m] − 1 Skip if [m]=0 None 167 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Affected flag(s) Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0, the program proceeds with the following instruction. ACC ← [m] − 1 Skip if ACC=0 None SET [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Set Data Memory Each bit of the specified Data Memory is set to 1. [m] ← FFH None SET [m].i Description Operation Affected flag(s) Set bit of Data Memory Bit i of the specified Data Memory is set to 1. [m].i ← 1 None SIZ [m] Description Skip if increment Data Memory is 0 The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction. [m] ← [m] + 1 Skip if [m]=0 None SDZA [m] Description Operation Operation Affected flag(s) SIZA [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) SNZ [m].i Description Operation Affected flag(s) SUB A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction. ACC ← [m] + 1 Skip if ACC=0 None Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not 0 If bit i of the specified Data Memory is not 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction. Skip if [m].i ≠ 0 None Subtract Data Memory from ACC The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1. ACC ← ACC − [m] OV, Z, AC, C 168 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SUBM A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1. [m] ← ACC − [m] OV, Z, AC, C Operation Affected flag(s) Subtract immediate data from ACC The immediate data specified by the code is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1. ACC ← ACC − x OV, Z, AC, C SWAP [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) Swap nibbles of Data Memory The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged. [m].3~[m].0 ↔ [m].7~[m].4 None SWAPA [m] Description Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged. The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged. ACC.3~ACC.0 ← [m].7~[m].4 ACC.7~ACC.4 ← [m].3~[m].0 None SUB A,x Description Operation Affected flag(s) SZ [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) SZA [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) SZ [m].i Description Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 Skip if Data Memory is 0 If the contents of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction. Skip if [m]=0 None Skip if Data Memory is 0 with data movement to ACC The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator. If the value is zero, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction. ACC ← [m] Skip if [m]=0 None Skip if bit i of Data Memory is 0 If bit i of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0, the program proceeds with the following instruction. Skip if [m].i=0 None 169 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver TABRDC [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) TABRDL [m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) XOR A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) XORM A,[m] Description Operation Affected flag(s) XOR A,x Description Operation Affected flag(s) Rev. 1.20 Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory The low byte of the program code (current page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH. [m] ← program code (low byte) TBLH ← program code (high byte) None Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory The low byte of the program code (last page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH. [m] ← program code (low byte) TBLH ← program code (high byte) None Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator. ACC ← ACC ″XOR″ [m] Z Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory. [m] ← ACC ″XOR″ [m] Z Logical XOR immediate data to ACC Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator. ACC ← ACC ″XOR″ x Z 170 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Package Information Note that the package information provided here is for consultation purposes only. As this information may be updated at regular intervals users are reminded to consult the Holtek website (http://www.holtek.com.tw/english/literature/package.pdf) for the latest version of the package information. 24-pin SKDIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions Fig1. Full Lead Packages Fig2. 1/2 Lead Packages MS-001d (see fig1) Symbol Min. Nom. Max. A 1.230 ― 1.280 B 0.240 ― 0.280 C 0.115 ― 0.195 D 0.115 ― 0.150 E 0.014 ― 0.022 0.070 F 0.045 ― G ― 0.100 ― H 0.300 ― 0.325 I ― 0.430 ― Symbol Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. 31.24 ― 32.51 B 6.10 ― 7.11 C 2.92 ― 4.95 A Rev. 1.20 Dimensions in inch D 2.92 ― 3.81 E 0.36 ― 0.56 1.78 F 1.14 ― G ― 2.54 ― H 7.62 ― 8.26 I ― 10.92 ― 171 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver MS-001d (see fig2) Symbol Min. Nom. Max. A 1.160 ― 1.195 B 0.240 ― 0.280 C 0.115 ― 0.195 D 0.115 ― 0.150 E 0.014 ― 0.022 F 0.045 ― 0.070 G ― 0.100 ― H 0.300 ― 0.325 I ― 0.430 ― Symbol A Rev. 1.20 Dimensions in inch Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. 29.46 ― 30.35 B 6.10 ― 7.11 C 2.92 ― 4.95 D 2.92 ― 3.81 E 0.36 ― 0.56 F 1.14 ― 1.78 G ― 2.54 ― H 7.62 ― 8.26 I ― 10.92 ― 172 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver MS-095a (see fig2) Symbol Min. Nom. Max. A 1.145 ― 1.185 B 0.275 ― 0.295 C 0.120 ― 0.150 D 0.110 ― 0.150 E 0.014 ― 0.022 F 0.045 ― 0.060 G ― 0.100 ― H 0.300 ― 0.325 I ― 0.430 ― Symbol A Rev. 1.20 Dimensions in inch Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. 29.08 ― 30.10 B 6.99 ― 7.49 C 3.05 ― 3.81 D 2.79 ― 3.81 E 0.36 ― 0.56 F 1.14 ― 1.52 G ― 2.54 ― H 7.62 ― 8.26 I ― 10.92 ― 173 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver 24-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions MS-013 Symbol Nom. Max. A 0.393 — 0.419 B 0.256 — 0.300 C C׳ 0.012 — 0.020 0.598 — 0.613 D — — 0.104 E — 0.050 — F 0.004 — 0.012 G 0.016 — 0.050 H 0.008 — 0.013 α 0° — 8° Symbol A Rev. 1.20 Dimensions in inch Min. Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. 9.98 — 10.64 — 7.62 — 15.57 2.64 B 6.50 C C׳ 0.30 15.19 D — — E — 1.27 — F 0.10 — 0.30 G 0.41 — 1.27 H 0.20 — 0.33 α 0° — 8° 0.51 174 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver 24-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions Symbol Dimensions in inch Min. Nom. Max. A 0.228 — 0.244 B 0.150 — 0.157 C C׳ 0.008 — 0.012 0.335 — 0.346 D 0.054 — 0.060 E — 0.025 — F 0.004 — 0.010 G 0.022 — 0.028 H 0.007 — 0.010 α 0° — 8° Symbol Rev. 1.20 Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. A 5.79 — 6.20 B 3.81 — 3.99 C C׳ 0.20 8.51 — 8.79 D 1.37 — 1.52 E — 0.64 — F 0.10 — 0.25 0.30 G 0.56 — 0.71 H 0.18 — 0.25 α 0° — 8° 175 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver 28-pin SKDIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions Symbol Dimensions in inch Min. Nom. Max. A 1.375 ― 1.395 B 0.278 ― 0.298 C 0.125 ― 0.135 D 0.125 ― 0.145 E 0.016 ― 0.020 F 0.050 ― 0.070 G ― 0.100 ― H 0.295 ― 0.315 I ― 0.375 ― Symbol Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. 34.93 ― 35.43 B 7.06 ― 7.57 C 3.18 ― 3.43 3.68 A Rev. 1.20 D 3.18 ― E 0.41 ― 0.51 F 1.27 ― 1.78 G ― 2.54 ― H 7.49 ― 8.00 I ― 9.53 ― 176 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver 28-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions MS-013 Symbol Min. Nom. Max. A 0.393 — 0.419 B 0.256 — 0.300 C C׳ 0.012 — 0.020 0.697 — 0.713 D — — 0.104 E — 0.050 — F 0.004 — 0.012 G 0.016 — 0.050 H 0.008 — 0.013 α 0° — 8° Symbol Rev. 1.20 Dimensions in inch Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. A 9.98 — 10.64 B 6.50 — 7.62 C C׳ 17.70 — 18.11 D — — 2.64 E — 1.27 — F 0.10 — 0.30 G 0.41 — 1.27 H 0.20 — 0.33 α 0° — 8° 0.30 0.51 177 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver 28-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions Symbol Dimensions in inch Min. Nom. Max. A 0.228 — 0.244 B 0.150 — 0.157 C C׳ 0.008 — 0.012 0.386 — 0.394 D 0.054 — 0.060 E — 0.025 — F 0.004 — 0.010 G 0.022 — 0.028 H 0.007 — 0.010 α 0° — 8° Symbol Rev. 1.20 Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. A 5.79 — 6.20 B 3.81 — 3.99 C C׳ 0.20 — 10.01 D 1.37 — 1.52 E — 0.64 — F 0.10 — 0.25 G 0.56 — 0.71 H 0.18 — 0.25 α 0° — 8° 0.30 9.80 178 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver 44-pin QFP (10mm×10mm) Outline Dimensions Symbol Dimensions in inch Min. Nom. Max. A 0.512 — 0.528 B 0.390 — 0.398 C 0.512 — 0.528 D 0.390 — 0.398 E — 0.031 — F — 0.012 — G 0.075 — 0.087 H — — 0.106 I 0.010 — 0.020 J 0.029 — 0.037 K 0.004 — 0.008 L — 0.004 — α 0° — 7° Symbol Rev. 1.20 Dimensions in mm Min. Nom. Max. A 13.00 — 13.40 B 9.90 — 10.10 C 13.00 — 13.40 D 9.90 — 10.10 E — 0.80 — F — 0.30 — G 1.90 — 2.20 H — — 2.70 I 0.25 — 0.50 J 0.73 — 0.93 K 0.10 — 0.20 L — 0.10 — α 0° — 7° 179 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Product Tape and Reel Specifications Reel Dimensions SOP 24W (300mil), SOP 28W (300mil) Symbol Description Dimensions in mm A Reel Outer Diameter 330.0±1.0 B Reel Inner Diameter 100.0±1.5 C Spindle Hole Diameter 13.0+0.5/-0.2 D Key Slit Width T1 Space Between Flang 24.8+0.3/-0.2 2.0±0.5 T2 Reel Thickness 30.2±0.2 SSOP 24S (150mil), SSOP 28S (150mil) Symbol Rev. 1.20 Description Dimensions in mm A Reel Outer Diameter 330.0±1.0 B Reel Inner Diameter 100.0±1.5 C Spindle Hole Diameter 13.0+0.5/-0.2 D Key Slit Width T1 Space Between Flang 16.8+0.3/-0.2 2.0±0.5 T2 Reel Thickness 22.2±0.2 180 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Carrier Tape Dimensions SOP 24W Symbol Description Dimensions in mm W Carrier Tape Width P Cavity Pitch 24.0±0.3 12.0±0.1 E Perforation Position 1.75±0.10 F Cavity to Perforation(Width Direction) D Perforation Diameter 1.55+0.10/-0.00 D1 Cavity Hole Diameter 1.50+0.25/-0.00 P0 Perforation Pitch 4.0±0.1 P1 Cavity to Perforation(Length Direction) 2.0±0.1 11.5±0.1 A0 Cavity Length 10.9±0.10 B0 Cavity Width 15.9±0.10 K0 Cavity Depth 3.1±0.1 t Carrier Tape Thickness 0.35±0.05 C Cover Tape Width 21.3±0.1 SSOP 24S (150mil) Symbol Rev. 1.20 Description W Carrier Tape Width Dimensions in mm 16.0+0.3/-0.1 P Cavity Pitch E Perforation Position 8.0±0.1 F Cavity to Perforation(Width Direction) 7.5±0.1 D Perforation Diameter 1.5+0.1/-0.0 D1 Cavity Hole Diameter 1.50+0.25/-0.00 P0 Perforation Pitch 4.0±0.1 P1 Cavity to Perforation(Length Direction) 2.0±0.1 1.75±0.10 A0 Cavity Length 6.5±0.1 B0 Cavity Width 9.5±0.1 K0 Cavity Depth 2.1±0.1 t Carrier Tape Thickness 0.30±0.05 C Cover Tape Width 13.3±0.1 181 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver SOP 28W (300mil) Symbol Description Dimensions in mm W Carrier Tape Width P Cavity Pitch 24.0±0.3 12.0±0.1 E Perforation Position 1.75±0.10 F Cavity to Perforation(Width Direction) D Perforation Diameter 1.5+0.10/-0.00 11.5±0.1 D1 Cavity Hole Diameter 1.50+0.25/-0.00 P0 Perforation Pitch 4.0±0.1 P1 Cavity to Perforation(Length Direction) 2.0±0.1 A0 Cavity Length 10.85±0.10 B0 Cavity Width 18.34±0.10 K0 Cavity Depth 2.97±0.10 t Carrier Tape Thickness 0.35±0.01 C Cover Tape Width 21.3±0.1 SSOP 28S (150mil) Symbol Rev. 1.20 Description W Carrier Tape Width P Cavity Pitch E Perforation Position Dimensions in mm 16.0+0.3 8.0±0.1 1.75±0.10 F Cavity to Perforation(Width Direction) D Perforation Diameter 1.55+0.1/-0.0 7.5±0.1 D1 Cavity Hole Diameter 1.50+0.25/-0.00 P0 Perforation Pitch 4.0±0.1 P1 Cavity to Perforation(Length Direction) 2.0±0.1 A0 Cavity Length 6.5±0.1 B0 Cavity Width 10.3±0.1 K0 Cavity Depth 2.1±0.1 t Carrier Tape Thickness 0.30±0.05 C Cover Tape Width 13.3±0.1 182 August 10, 2012 BS85B12-3/BS85C20-3/BS85C20-5 Touch Key Flash MCU with LCD/LED Driver Holtek Semiconductor Inc. (Headquarters) No.3, Creation Rd. II, Science Park, Hsinchu, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-563-1999 Fax: 886-3-563-1189 http://www.holtek.com.tw Holtek Semiconductor Inc. (Taipei Sales Office) 4F-2, No. 3-2, YuanQu St., Nankang Software Park, Taipei 115, Taiwan Tel: 886-2-2655-7070 Fax: 886-2-2655-7373 Fax: 886-2-2655-7383 (International sales hotline) Holtek Semiconductor Inc. (Shenzhen Sales Office) 5F, Unit A, Productivity Building, No.5 Gaoxin M 2nd Road, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, China 518057 Tel: 86-755-8616-9908, 86-755-8616-9308 Fax: 86-755-8616-9722 Holtek Semiconductor (USA), Inc. (North America Sales Office) 46729 Fremont Blvd., Fremont, CA 94538, USA Tel: 1-510-252-9880 Fax: 1-510-252-9885 http://www.holtek.com Copyright© 2012 by HOLTEK SEMICONDUCTOR INC. The information appearing in this Data Sheet is believed to be accurate at the time of publication. However, Holtek assumes no responsibility arising from the use of the specifications described. The applications mentioned herein are used solely for the purpose of illustration and Holtek makes no warranty or representation that such applications will be suitable without further modification, nor recommends the use of its products for application that may present a risk to human life due to malfunction or otherwise. Holtek's products are not authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems. Holtek reserves the right to alter its products without prior notification. For the most up-to-date information, please visit our web site at http://www.holtek.com.tw. Rev. 1.20 183 August 10, 2012